[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025004512A1 - Light source apparatus and cleaning method - Google Patents

Light source apparatus and cleaning method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025004512A1
WO2025004512A1 PCT/JP2024/015966 JP2024015966W WO2025004512A1 WO 2025004512 A1 WO2025004512 A1 WO 2025004512A1 JP 2024015966 W JP2024015966 W JP 2024015966W WO 2025004512 A1 WO2025004512 A1 WO 2025004512A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pressure
vacuum chamber
light source
plasma
light
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2024/015966
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
晃尚 長野
和彦 信田
芙貴 佐藤
則孝 芦澤
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ushio Denki KK
Original Assignee
Ushio Denki KK
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ushio Denki KK filed Critical Ushio Denki KK
Publication of WO2025004512A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025004512A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05GX-RAY TECHNIQUE
    • H05G2/00Apparatus or processes specially adapted for producing X-rays, not involving X-ray tubes, e.g. involving generation of a plasma

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a light source device that uses plasma as a light source and a cleaning method.
  • synchrotron radiation in the X-ray region can be obtained by appropriately selecting the type of plasma raw material and the excitation energy for generating the plasma.
  • synchrotron radiation for example, X-rays with short wavelengths are used for various purposes such as X-ray photography, non-destructive testing, X-ray analysis, and X-ray spectroscopy.
  • extreme ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 13.5 nm hereinafter referred to as "EUV (Extreme Ultra Violet) light
  • EUV Extreme Ultra Violet
  • Typical EUV light source devices include DPP (Discharge Produced Plasma) light source devices, LDP (Laser Assisted Discharge Produced Plasma) light source devices, and LPP (Laser Produced Plasma) light source devices.
  • DPP discharge Produced Plasma
  • LDP Laser Assisted Discharge Produced Plasma
  • LPP Laser Produced Plasma
  • the DPP light source device applies a high voltage between electrodes to which gaseous plasma raw material (discharge gas) containing EUV radiation species is supplied, generating a high-density, high-temperature plasma through discharge, and utilizes the extreme ultraviolet light emitted from it.
  • gaseous plasma raw material discharge gas
  • the LDP light source device is an improved version of the DPP light source device, and for example, it supplies liquid high-temperature plasma raw material (such as Sn (tin) or Li (lithium)) containing EUV radiating species to the surface of an electrode (discharge electrode) that generates a discharge, irradiates the raw material with an energy beam (such as an electron beam or laser beam) to vaporize the raw material, and then generates high-temperature plasma by discharging the material.
  • liquid high-temperature plasma raw material such as Sn (tin) or Li (lithium)
  • an energy beam such as an electron beam or laser beam
  • LPP light source devices excite EUV radiating species with a laser beam or the like to generate high-temperature plasma.
  • a known light source device of this type generates plasma by focusing laser light on droplets of EUV radiating target material, such as tin (Sn) or lithium (Li), ejected in the form of tiny liquid droplets.
  • Another known LPP light source device generates plasma by supplying liquid high-temperature plasma raw material containing EUV radiating species to the surface of a rotating body and irradiating the surface of the rotating body with an energy beam (laser beam).
  • debris is dispersed at high speed from the plasma generated by these light source devices.
  • This debris includes particles of high-temperature plasma raw materials and particles of the material of the discharge electrodes that are sputtered as the plasma is generated. If such debris reaches the utilization device that utilizes radiation such as EUV light, it is possible that it will damage or contaminate optical elements such as reflective films installed in the utilization device. For this reason, the light source devices are equipped with a debris reduction device (also called a DMT (Debris Mitigation Tool)) that captures debris between the plasma and the utilization device to prevent debris dispersed from the plasma from entering the utilization device.
  • a debris reduction device also called a DMT (Debris Mitigation Tool)
  • Patent Document 1 describes a DPP type light source device that maintains the pressure on the light source side using an aperture member.
  • an aperture member is provided between the discharge space where plasma is generated by discharge and the collection space where the EUV light collector is provided.
  • a gas curtain is formed downstream of the aperture member to reduce debris from the plasma.
  • Patent Document 2 describes a method for cleaning optical elements irradiated with light in an irradiation device that irradiates extreme ultraviolet rays and the like.
  • a reaction partner containing hydrogen or halogen is supplied near the optical element while the irradiation device is in operation, and the reaction partner that has become a radical due to the light is used to clean debris and the like that has adhered to the optical element (see, for example, paragraphs [0114]-[0116], Figure 1 in the specification of Patent Document 1).
  • the pressure in the space in which the optical element is located changes when the reaction partner is supplied or when the supply is stopped.
  • the pressure on the introduction side of the synchrotron radiation needs to be changed in response to maintenance of the device, changes in conditions, etc.
  • the object of the present invention is to provide a light source device and cleaning method that can suppress changes in pressure on the light source side caused by changes in pressure on the input side of the radiation light.
  • a light source device includes a first vacuum chamber, a light source unit, and a debris reduction device.
  • the light source unit generates plasma that serves as a light source in the first vacuum chamber.
  • the debris mitigation device is a debris mitigation device that reduces debris dispersed from the plasma, and forms a vacuum path that connects the first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber into which radiation emitted from the plasma is introduced and allows the radiation to pass through, and generates a high-pressure region whose pressure is higher than the pressure of the first vacuum chamber and the pressure of the second vacuum chamber so as to block the vacuum path.
  • the debris reduction device forms a vacuum path connecting a first vacuum chamber that generates plasma and a second vacuum chamber into which radiation from the plasma is introduced. Furthermore, a high-pressure region with a pressure higher than the pressure in the first vacuum chamber and the pressure in the second vacuum chamber is formed so as to block the vacuum path. This allows pressure changes in, for example, the second vacuum chamber to be absorbed by the high-pressure region. This makes it possible to suppress changes in pressure on the light source side due to changes in pressure on the radiation introduction side.
  • the debris mitigation apparatus may include a conductance reducer that reduces the conductance of the vacuum path between the high pressure region and the second vacuum chamber. This makes it possible to maintain a high pressure region without being affected by the pressure in the second vacuum chamber, for example, and makes it possible to sufficiently absorb changes in pressure on the introduction side.
  • the conductance reducing portion may be a fixed foil trap having a plurality of foils disposed in the vacuum path and a fixing member that fixes the plurality of foils. This allows for debris reduction with fixed foil traps.
  • the debris mitigation apparatus may include a tubular member disposed between the high pressure region and the first vacuum chamber, the tubular member having a cross section intersecting with a path direction of the vacuum path larger than that of the high pressure region. This makes it possible, for example, to reduce the pressure in the high pressure region over a short distance and maintain it at the pressure of the first vacuum chamber.
  • the debris mitigation device may include a rotary foil trap having a plurality of foils and a rotary member that radially supports the plurality of foils, in which case the cylindrical member may be a rotary foil trap cover that surrounds the rotary foil trap. This allows for debris reduction with a rotating foil trap.
  • the debris mitigation apparatus may allow the pressure in the first vacuum chamber to remain substantially unchanged when the pressure in the second vacuum chamber varies at least within a range equal to or less than the pressure of the high pressure region. This makes it possible to sufficiently maintain the pressure in the first vacuum chamber even if the pressure in the second vacuum chamber changes, for example.
  • the pressure in the high pressure region may be six times or more the pressure in the first vacuum chamber. This makes it possible to reliably absorb, for example, pressure changes on the introduction side.
  • the light source device may further include an inlet for introducing a buffer gas that changes the pressure in the second vacuum chamber, and a pressure adjustment mechanism for adjusting the pressure in the second vacuum chamber. This makes it possible to easily adjust the pressure in, for example, the second vacuum chamber, and thus realize various operation modes.
  • the high pressure region may be a region into which the buffer gas is introduced.
  • the inlet may include a first inlet leading to the high pressure region. This makes it possible, for example, to change the pressure in the second vacuum chamber while realizing a high pressure region.
  • the light source device may further include the second vacuum chamber.
  • the introduction port may include a second introduction port provided in the second vacuum chamber. This makes it possible, for example, to easily change the pressure in the second vacuum chamber.
  • the buffer gas may be an ionized gas that is ionized by the radiation.
  • the light source device may be capable of a normal operation and a cleaning operation using the ionized gas. This makes it possible to clean optical elements and the like provided in the second vacuum chamber while stably generating radiation, for example.
  • the cleaning operation may be an operation of introducing the ionized gas into a second vacuum chamber maintained at a first pressure which is the pressure during normal operation, increasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to a second pressure higher than the first pressure, and performing sputtering on a target placed in the second vacuum chamber using the ionized gas ionized by the synchrotron radiation while maintaining the second pressure.
  • This makes it possible to sputter, for example, an optical element or the like disposed in the second vacuum chamber at a desired rate.
  • the second pressure may be 6 Pa or more. This makes it possible to perform sputtering at a desired rate, for example.
  • the pressure of the first vacuum chamber during normal operation may be set to a third pressure at which the radiation is stable.
  • the second pressure may be three times or more the third pressure. This allows, for example, sputtering to be carried out at a relatively high rate.
  • the ionizable gas may be a noble gas. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the members inside each chamber from being corroded by the ionized gas, and also makes it possible to easily treat the gas exhausted from each chamber.
  • the light source device may further include the second vacuum chamber and a light amount monitor provided in the second vacuum chamber and configured to detect an amount of the radiated light.
  • the normal operation and the cleaning operation may be switched and executed based on a detection result of the light amount monitor. This makes it possible to perform cleaning in response to contamination of, for example, optical elements.
  • the pressure adjustment mechanism may be at least one of a flow rate adjustment valve that adjusts the flow rate of the buffer gas introduced from the inlet, or an exhaust rate adjustment valve that adjusts the exhaust rate of the second vacuum chamber. This makes it possible to precisely adjust the pressure in, for example, the second vacuum chamber.
  • the radiation may be EUV light. This makes it possible to realize, for example, an EUV light source device that is easy to maintain and has a stable light output.
  • the light source unit may include a pair of rotating electrodes arranged in the first vacuum chamber on either side of a discharge region, a raw material supply unit that supplies plasma raw material to the pair of rotating electrodes, an energy beam injection unit that injects an energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw material onto a portion of one of the pair of rotating electrodes facing the discharge region, and a voltage source that applies a voltage to the pair of rotating electrodes to convert the plasma raw material vaporized by the energy beam into plasma.
  • the light source unit may have a rotating body disposed in the first vacuum chamber, a raw material supply unit that supplies plasma raw material to the rotating body, and an energy beam incident unit that incidents an energy beam that converts the plasma raw material supplied to the rotating body into plasma.
  • a cleaning method is a cleaning method performed using the light source device, and includes the following steps. a pressure increasing step of introducing an ionized gas that is ionized by the synchrotron radiation into a second vacuum chamber maintained at a first pressure that is a pressure during normal operation while the plasma is being generated, and increasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to a second pressure that is higher than the first pressure. a sputtering step of performing sputtering on a target disposed in the second vacuum chamber with the ionized gas ionized by the synchrotron radiation while maintaining the second pressure;
  • the light source device may further include the second vacuum chamber and a light quantity monitor provided in the second vacuum chamber and detecting the quantity of the emitted light.
  • the pressure increasing step and the sputtering step may be executed when the quantity of light detected by the light quantity monitor becomes lower than a first threshold.
  • the light source device may further include a pressure decreasing step of decreasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to the first pressure when the quantity of light detected by the light quantity monitor becomes higher than a second threshold equal to or higher than the first threshold. This makes it possible to perform cleaning in response to contamination of, for example, optical elements.
  • the sputtering step may include a step of changing an amount of the synchrotron radiation from an amount of the synchrotron radiation during the normal operation while maintaining the second pressure. This allows fine control of, for example, the sputtering rate.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a light source device according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a debris reduction device mounted on a light source device.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap cover.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap cover.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a light source device according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a debris reduction device mounted on a light source device.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap cover.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap cover.
  • 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the configuration of a debris reduction device.
  • 11 is a graph showing a simulation result of the pressure inside the light source device.
  • 4 is a graph showing a relationship between the pressure in a first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of samples used in a sputtering experiment. 1 is a graph showing the relationship between sputtering rate and pressure.
  • FIG. 1 is a graph showing the relationship between sputter rate, pressure, and sample position. 1 is a graph showing the relationship between the sputtering rate and the emission frequency of plasma. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the light source device.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating a sputtering region where sputtering occurs.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of an optical system using a light shielding plate.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of an optical system using a light-shielding plate.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of an LPP type light source unit.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of the light source unit of the LPP method;
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a light source device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-section of the light source device 100 cut horizontally at a position of a predetermined height from the installation surface, as viewed from the positive side of the Z direction.
  • the X direction is the left-right direction (the positive side of the X axis is the right side, and the negative side is the left side)
  • the Y direction is the depth direction (the positive side of the Y axis is the front side, and the negative side is the back side)
  • the Z direction is the up-down direction (the positive side of the Z axis is the upper side, and the negative side is the lower side).
  • the application of this technology is not limited to the orientation in which the light source device 100 is used.
  • the light source device 100 is an LDP type EUV light source device, and emits extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light 1).
  • EUV light 1 The wavelength of the EUV light 1 is, for example, 13.5 nm.
  • the light source device 100 can be used, for example, as a light source device for a lithography device in semiconductor device manufacturing, or as a light source device for an inspection device for a mask used in lithography.
  • a portion of the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P is extracted and guided to the mask inspection device.
  • the mask inspection device performs mask blank inspection or pattern inspection using the EUV light 1 emitted from the light source device 100 as inspection light.
  • EUV light 1 is an example of radiation emitted from plasma.
  • the type of radiation is not limited.
  • the present invention is also applicable to cases where light in the soft X-ray region other than EUV light 1, or hard X-rays with higher energy, etc. are emitted.
  • the light source device 100 has a first vacuum chamber 10, a second vacuum chamber 20, a light source unit 30, and a debris reduction device 40.
  • the first vacuum chamber 10 is a vacuum chamber in which the light source unit 30 generates plasma P.
  • the second vacuum chamber 20 is a vacuum chamber into which the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P is introduced.
  • the debris reduction device 40 is a device that reduces debris dissipated from the plasma P between the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the first vacuum chamber 10 is a housing that houses various mechanisms of the light source unit 30.
  • the first vacuum chamber 10 has, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped or cylindrical shape, and is made of a rigid body such as metal.
  • the specific shape, material, etc. of the first vacuum chamber 10 are not limited.
  • the inside of the first vacuum chamber 10 is maintained at a reduced pressure atmosphere below a predetermined pressure by a vacuum pump (not shown).
  • Feedthroughs FA and FB are arranged on the left side wall 10a of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the feedthroughs FA and FB are sealing members that allow electrical wires, etc. to be inserted into the first vacuum chamber 10 while maintaining the reduced pressure atmosphere inside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • a transparent window 11 is disposed on the side wall 10b on the front side of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the transparent window 11 is made of a material that is transparent to the laser beam LB described below.
  • the specific configuration of the transparent window 11, such as its material and shape, is not limited.
  • a through hole 12 for connecting to the second vacuum chamber 20 is provided on the right side wall 10c of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • a debris reduction device 40 is disposed inside the first vacuum chamber 10 so as to cover the through hole 12.
  • the second vacuum chamber 20 is a housing that houses an optical element 21 into which the EUV light 1 is incident, for example.
  • the optical element 21 is, for example, a collector mirror for collecting the EUV light 1, a reflecting mirror for bending the optical path of the EUV light 1, or the like.
  • the second vacuum chamber 20 may be configured as a container that connects a utilization device (such as a mask inspection device or a lithography device) that utilizes the EUV light 1 to a light source device.
  • the second vacuum chamber 20 has, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped or cylindrical shape, and is configured of a rigid body such as metal. Of course, the specific shape, material, etc. of the second vacuum chamber 20 are not limited.
  • the interior of the second vacuum chamber 20 is maintained at a reduced pressure atmosphere below a predetermined pressure by a vacuum pump (not shown).
  • a through hole 22 that communicates with the through hole 12 of the first vacuum chamber 10 is arranged in the left side wall 20a of the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • an exit port (not shown) for emitting the EUV light 1 that has passed through the optical element 21, etc. are appropriately provided in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the light source device 100 does not necessarily need to include the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the second vacuum chamber 20 may be provided on the utilization device side.
  • a vacuum chamber or the like provided on the utilization device for introducing the EUV light 1 is used as the second vacuum chamber.
  • the light source unit 30 generates plasma P, which serves as a light source, in the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the light source unit 30 has a discharge module 31, a control unit 32, a pulsed power supply unit 33, a laser source 34, a condenser lens 35, and a movable mirror 36.
  • the control unit 32, the pulsed power supply unit 33, the laser source 34, the condenser lens 35, and the movable mirror 36 are provided outside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the discharge module 31 is a module that performs discharge to generate plasma P within the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the discharge module 31 has containers CA and CB, discharge electrodes EA and EB, and motors MA and MB. Of these, the containers CA and CB and the discharge electrodes EA and EB are disposed inside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • Containers CA and CB are vessels for storing plasma raw materials.
  • containers CA and CB are made of a conductive material.
  • Plasma raw material SA is stored in container CA.
  • Plasma raw material SB is stored in container CB.
  • Plasma raw materials SA and SB are heated liquid phase raw materials.
  • tin (Sn) is used as plasma raw materials SA and SB.
  • other raw materials capable of generating plasma such as lithium (Li), may be used.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB have a disk shape.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB are made of a high melting point metal such as molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W) or tantalum (Ta).
  • Mo molybdenum
  • W tungsten
  • Ta tantalum
  • the specific material of the discharge electrodes EA and EB is not limited.
  • the discharge electrode EA is used as a cathode
  • the discharge electrode EB is used as an anode.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB are arranged at a distance from each other.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB are also arranged so that a portion of the periphery of each of the discharge electrodes EA and EB is close to each other.
  • the gap at the position where the peripheries of the discharge electrodes EA and EB are closest to each other becomes the discharge region D formed by the discharge electrodes EA and EB.
  • the discharge electrode EA is positioned so that the lower part of the discharge electrode EA is immersed in the plasma raw material SA stored in the container CA.
  • the discharge electrode EB is positioned so that the lower part of the discharge electrode EA is immersed in the plasma raw material SB.
  • the motor MA rotates the discharge electrode EA.
  • the motor MA has a rotation axis JA.
  • the base part of the motor MA is placed outside the first vacuum chamber 10 on the left side, and the rotation axis JA connected to the base part extends from the outside to the inside of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the end of the rotation axis JA on the inside side of the first vacuum chamber 10 is connected to the center of the discharge electrode EA (the center of the circular surface).
  • the gap between the rotating shaft JA and the wall of the first vacuum chamber 10 is sealed with a sealing member PA.
  • a sealing member PA For example, a mechanical seal is used as the sealing member PA.
  • the sealing member PA supports the rotating shaft JA so that it can rotate freely while maintaining the reduced pressure atmosphere inside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the motor MB has a rotating shaft JB, which is connected to the center of the discharge electrode EB.
  • the gap between the rotating shaft JB and the wall of the first vacuum chamber 10 is sealed with a sealing member PB.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB are arranged so that their axes (extension directions of the rotation shafts) are not parallel. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the discharge electrode EA is arranged with its front side (lower side in FIG. 1) tilted to the right and its rear side (upper side in FIG. 1) tilted to the left. On the other hand, the discharge electrode EB is arranged with its front side tilted to the left and its rear side tilted to the right.
  • the distance between the rotation shafts JA and JB in the depth direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1, Z direction) is also narrower on the side of the motors MA and MB and wider on the side of the discharge electrodes EA and EB. Furthermore, the discharge electrode EB, motor MB and rotation shaft JB are arranged slightly to the left of the discharge electrode EA, motor MA and rotation shaft JA.
  • the control unit 32 controls the operation of each unit of the light source unit 30.
  • the control unit 32 controls the rotational driving of the motors MA and MB, and the discharge electrodes EA and EB rotate at a predetermined number of rotations.
  • the control unit 32 controls the operation of the pulsed power supply unit 33 and the timing of laser beam irradiation by the laser source 34 .
  • the control unit 32 is realized by a controller having hardware necessary for configuring a computer, such as a processor such as a CPU, GPU, or DSP, memory such as a ROM or RAM, and a storage device such as a HDD. Specifically, the control unit 32 is realized as a functional block by the CPU of the controller executing a program related to the present technology (e.g., an application program).
  • a program related to the present technology e.g., an application program
  • the pulsed power supply unit 33 generates a discharge in the discharge region D by supplying pulsed power to the discharge electrodes EA and EB.
  • Power feed lines QA and QB are connected to the pulsed power supply unit 33.
  • the power feed line QA is inserted into the first vacuum chamber 10 via a feedthrough FA and is connected to a container CA.
  • the power feed line QB is inserted into the first vacuum chamber 10 via a feedthrough FB and is connected to a container CB.
  • the laser source 34 emits an energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw materials SA and SB.
  • the laser source 34 is disposed outside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • a Nd:YVO 4 (Neodymium-doped Yttrium Orthovanadate) laser device is used as the laser source 34.
  • the laser source 34 emits a laser beam LB in the infrared region with a wavelength of 1064 nm.
  • the specific configuration of the laser source 34 such as the type of device of the laser source 34 and the wavelength of the irradiated laser beam LB, is not limited.
  • the focusing lens 35 is disposed on the optical path of the laser beam LB outside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the spot diameter of the laser beam LB is adjusted by the laser beam LB emitted by the laser source 34 being incident on the focusing lens 35.
  • the movable mirror 36 is disposed on the optical path of the laser beam LB outside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the movable mirror 36 is disposed on the optical path of the laser beam LB behind the focusing lens 35. Therefore, the laser beam LB that passes through the focusing lens 35 is incident on the movable mirror.
  • the laser beam LB incident on the movable mirror 36 is reflected by the movable mirror 36 and passes through the transparent window 11 of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the laser beam LB then reaches the periphery of the discharge electrode EA near the discharge region D inside the first vacuum chamber 10. Note that by changing the position of the movable mirror 36, it is possible to adjust the irradiation position of the laser beam LB with respect to the discharge electrode EA.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB are arranged in the first vacuum chamber 10 on either side of the discharge region D. Furthermore, plasma raw materials SA and SB are supplied to the discharge electrodes EA and EB from containers CA and CB, respectively.
  • the discharge electrodes EA and EB correspond to a pair of rotating electrodes
  • the containers CA and CB correspond to the raw material supply unit.
  • the laser source 34, the condenser lens 35, and the movable mirror 36 cause the laser beam LB to be incident on the portion of one of the discharge electrodes EA and EB, the discharge electrode EA, that faces the discharge region D.
  • the liquid-phase plasma raw material SA transported to the vicinity of the discharge region D as the discharge electrode EA rotates becomes gas-phase plasma raw material SA.
  • the plasma raw material SB transported by the discharge electrode EB also becomes gas-phase plasma raw material SB in the discharge region D.
  • the energy beam incident portion is realized using the laser source 34, the condenser lens 35, and the movable mirror 36.
  • the laser beam LB corresponds to the energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw material.
  • the pulsed power supply unit 33 also applies a voltage (pulsed power) to the discharge electrodes EA and EB to convert the plasma raw material vaporized by the laser beam LB into plasma. This generates a discharge in the discharge region D between the discharge electrodes EA and EB. This discharge heats and excites the gaseous plasma raw materials SA and SB present in the discharge region D with the current, generating plasma P.
  • the pulsed power supply unit 33 corresponds to a voltage source.
  • EUV light 1 is emitted from the plasma P generated in the discharge region D.
  • a portion of the emitted EUV light 1 passes through a debris mitigation device 40, which will be described later, and is introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • a debris mitigation device 40 which will be described later.
  • FIG. 1 an example of the optical path of the EUV light 1 is shown by a dashed arrow.
  • the plasma P corresponds to one embodiment of the light source related to this technology.
  • the inside of the first vacuum chamber 10 is maintained at a reduced pressure atmosphere below a predetermined pressure. This makes it possible to effectively generate a discharge for heating and exciting the plasma raw materials SA and SB. It also makes it possible to suppress attenuation of the EUV light 1.
  • the debris includes tin particles, which are the plasma raw materials SA and SB.
  • the debris also includes material particles of the discharge electrodes EA and EB that are sputtered as the plasma P is generated. More specifically, the debris includes ions, neutral atoms, and electrons that move at high speed. This debris gains large kinetic energy through the contraction and expansion processes of the plasma P. Part of the debris is dispersed towards the debris mitigation device 40.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of the debris mitigation device 40 mounted on the light source device 100.
  • Fig. 2 shows a cross section of the light source device 100 cut in the XZ plane as viewed from the front side. Note that Fig. 2 omits the configuration of the light source unit 30 other than the discharge module 31. The configuration of the discharge module 31 is also omitted in the illustration.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 is a device that reduces debris dispersed from the plasma P.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 is positioned so as to overlap with the optical path of the EUV light 1 traveling from the plasma P generated in the first vacuum chamber 10 toward the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 also includes a mechanism for capturing debris on the optical path of the EUV light.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 is configured to allow the EUV light 1 from the plasma P to pass through while capturing debris from the plasma P.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 is sometimes called a DMT (Debris Mitigation Tool).
  • a foil trap (a rotating foil trap 43 and a fixed foil trap 45, described below) is used as a mechanism for capturing debris.
  • a foil trap is a debris trap that uses multiple foils to capture debris from the plasma P.
  • multiple foils are arranged at a distance from each other. This allows the EUV light 1 to pass through between the foils. By using a foil trap, it is possible to capture debris ranging from large mm-sized debris to small atomic-sized debris.
  • the debris reduction device 40 forms a vacuum path 13 that connects the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 and allows the EUV light 1 to pass through.
  • the vacuum path 13 refers to a structure that connects, for example, two independent vacuum chambers without leaks to form an exhaust path. For example, when only one of two vacuum chambers connected by the vacuum path 13 is evacuated, the other vacuum chamber will always be evacuated via the vacuum path 13 (exhaust path).
  • Such a vacuum path 13 is formed inside the debris mitigation device 40.
  • the internal space of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the internal space of the second vacuum chamber 20 are connected by this vacuum path 13 without leaks.
  • the vacuum path 13 also functions as a passage for passing the EUV light 1.
  • the vacuum path 13 includes at least a straight path that allows the EUV light 1 to pass without being blocked.
  • the direction of the straight path through which the EUV light 1 passes is described as the path direction of the vacuum path 13.
  • the path direction of the vacuum path 13 is diagrammatically illustrated using a dotted arrow.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 generates a high pressure region 14 , the pressure of which is higher than the pressure in the first vacuum chamber 10 and the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 , so as to block the vacuum path 13 .
  • the region that blocks the vacuum path 13 means, for example, a region that completely covers the cross section of the vacuum path 13 and intersects with the path direction of the vacuum path 13. Therefore, in order to pass through the vacuum path 13, it is necessary to pass through the high pressure region 14.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 is configured so as to be able to generate such a high pressure region 14 midway through the vacuum path 13.
  • the part that becomes the high pressure region 14 is diagrammatically illustrated by a hatched region using dots.
  • the high pressure region 14 is a region in which it is possible to maintain an internal pressure higher than the pressure in either the first vacuum chamber 10 or the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the pressure (density) of the buffer gas 2 ambient gas
  • the debris reduction device 40 is basically used in a state in which the high pressure region 14 has been generated.
  • the high pressure region 14 can be said to be a region that separates the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10 from the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the debris reduction device 40 is provided with a cylindrical member 41 and a conductance reduction section 42 as a configuration for forming the high pressure region 14.
  • the cylindrical member 41 is a cylindrical member that surrounds the space that becomes the vacuum path 13, and is provided between the high pressure region 14 and the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the cylindrical member 41 has an opening (the exit side opening KO of the rotating foil trap cover 44) that is connected to the high pressure region 14, and an opening (the entrance side opening KI of the rotating foil trap cover 44) that is connected to the first vacuum chamber 10, and forms the vacuum path 13.
  • the cylindrical member 41 is a member whose cross section intersecting the path direction of the vacuum path 13 is larger than that of the high pressure region 14.
  • the cylindrical member 41 is a member that expands the width of the vacuum path 13 formed by the high pressure region 14 on the first vacuum chamber 10 side.
  • the conductance reduction section 42 is a member that reduces the conductance of the vacuum path 13 between the high pressure region 14 and the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the conductance reduction section 42 has a cylindrical structure that forms the vacuum path 13, and has an opening (the entrance end of the fixed foil trap 45) that is connected to the high pressure region 14, and an opening (the exit end of the fixed foil trap 45) that is connected to the second vacuum chamber 20. Between these two openings, a member that reduces the conductance of the vacuum compared to the other vacuum paths 13 is placed.
  • the vacuum conductance is a parameter that indicates how easily the buffer gas 2 flows, and corresponds to, for example, the inverse of the exhaust resistance.
  • the debris reduction device 40 has a rotating foil trap 43, a rotating foil trap cover 44, a fixed foil trap 45, and a fixed foil trap cover 46.
  • the rotating foil trap 43 is a foil trap in which multiple foils are rotated to actively collide with debris.
  • the rotating foil trap 43 is also called an RFT (Rotating Foil Trap).
  • the rotating foil trap cover 44 is a cylindrical cover configured to cover the outer periphery of the rotating foil trap 43.
  • the rotating foil trap 43 and the rotating foil trap cover 44 are arranged on the first vacuum chamber 10 side.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 is a foil trap in which the positions of multiple foils are fixed.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 is also called an SFT (Static Foil Trap).
  • the fixed foil trap cover 46 is a cover that covers the fixed foil trap 45.
  • the fixed foil trap cover 46 also functions as a member that connects the fixed foil trap 45 to the rotating foil trap cover 44. Note that the rotating foil trap cover 44 and the fixed foil trap cover 46 do not necessarily need to be completely connected, and for example, there may be some gaps as long as the pressure in the high pressure region 14 can be maintained.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 and the fixed foil trap cover 46 are arranged on the second vacuum chamber 20 side.
  • the above-mentioned vacuum path 13, cylindrical member 41, and conductance reduction section 42 are realized by utilizing these configurations for capturing debris.
  • the hollow area formed by connecting the rotating foil trap cover 44, the fixed foil trap cover 46, and the fixed foil trap 45 becomes the vacuum path 13.
  • the rotating foil trap cover 44 also functions as the cylindrical member 41.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 also functions as the conductance reduction section 42. Therefore, a high pressure area 14 is formed in the space from the rotating foil trap cover 44 to the fixed foil trap 45.
  • the specific configuration of each foil trap etc. will be explained in detail later.
  • the light source device 100 is provided with an inlet 47 for introducing the buffer gas 2.
  • the buffer gas 2 functions as a gas that changes the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20. Only one inlet 47 for the buffer gas 2 may be provided, or multiple inlets 47 may be provided.
  • a pipe through which the buffer gas 2 passes is connected to the inlet 47, and a flow rate adjustment valve for adjusting the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 is attached to the pipe.
  • the high pressure region 14 is the region in the debris mitigation device 40 where the buffer gas 2 is introduced, and the debris mitigation device 40 is provided with an inlet 47 that leads to the high pressure region 14.
  • This inlet 47 is provided, for example, in the fixed foil trap cover 46.
  • the inlet 47 that leads to the high pressure region 14 is diagrammatically illustrated by a dotted circle.
  • the inlet 47 that leads to the high pressure region 14 corresponds to the first inlet.
  • a buffer gas inlet (not shown) may be provided in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the buffer gas 2 is supplied directly to the second vacuum chamber 20, making it possible to easily change the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the inlet provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 corresponds to the second inlet.
  • the light source device 100 has a structure in which the first vacuum chamber 10 in which the EUV light 1 (plasma P) is generated is connected to the second vacuum chamber 20 in which optical elements and the like for utilizing the EUV light 1 are housed, via a vacuum path 13 formed by the debris reduction device 40.
  • an inlet 47 for a buffer gas 2 is provided in the debris reduction device 40 (high pressure region 14) or downstream of the debris reduction device 40 (on the second vacuum chamber 20 side).
  • the buffer gas 2 is argon gas.
  • Argon gas is an inert gas that does not easily form compounds with other atoms. Therefore, unlike active gases such as hydrogen gas and halogen gas, there is no need to worry about argon gas corroding metals in the chamber. In addition, since argon gas can be exhausted without any inactivation treatment, the exhaust system can be made smaller and less expensive than when exhausting active gases.
  • argon gas (buffer gas 2) is an ionized gas that is ionized by the EUV light 1. Using this phenomenon, the light source device 100 performs cleaning operations, which will be described later.
  • argon atoms Although argon atoms have some absorption at wavelengths of 13.5 nm, the amount of absorption is an order of magnitude lower than that of light at 30 nm to 80 nm. Therefore, there is little attenuation of the actinic wavelength of 13.5 nm, and it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of light even when argon gas is used as buffer gas 2.
  • Partition plate As shown in FIG. 2 , in the first vacuum chamber 10 , a first partition plate 16 and a second partition plate 17 are provided between the debris mitigation device 40 and the discharge module 31 .
  • the first partition plate 16 is a plate-shaped member with a larger planar size than the debris reduction device 40 (rotary foil trap cover 44), and is arranged to cover the side of the debris reduction device 40 facing the plasma P.
  • the first partition plate 16 has an opening 16a to which the second partition plate 17 is attached.
  • the first partition plate 16 restricts, for example, liquid-phase plasma raw material vapor (tin vapor in this case) from leaking into the space on the debris reduction device 40 side or into the second vacuum chamber 20, etc.
  • the second partition plate 17 is a plate-shaped member that covers the opening 16a provided in the first partition plate 16, and is fixed to the side of the first partition plate 16 that faces the plasma P.
  • the second partition plate 17 has an opening 17a through which the EUV light 1 to be introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20 passes, and an opening 17b through which the EUV light 1 to be introduced into a specified measuring instrument (first light intensity monitor 25a) passes.
  • the second partition plate 17 reduces the thermal load applied to the debris mitigation device 40 from the plasma P generated by the discharge, and limits the amount of debris heading toward the debris mitigation device 40.
  • the light source device 100 has a first vacuum valve 50 and a first vacuum gauge 51 connected to the first vacuum chamber 10, and a second vacuum valve 52 and a second vacuum gauge 53 connected to the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the first vacuum chamber 10 is provided with an exhaust hole 18 and a measurement hole 19.
  • the first vacuum valve 50 is connected to the exhaust hole 18 and is a valve that connects the first vacuum chamber 10 to the first vacuum pump 54.
  • the first vacuum gauge 51 is connected to the measurement hole 19 and detects the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the second vacuum chamber 20 is provided with an exhaust hole 28 and a measurement hole 29.
  • the second vacuum valve 52 is connected to the exhaust hole 28 and is a valve that connects the second vacuum chamber 20 to the second vacuum pump 55.
  • the second vacuum gauge 53 is connected to the measurement hole 29 and detects the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 are each evacuated separately. Furthermore, the high pressure region 14 described above is formed in the vacuum path 13 connecting each vacuum chamber, restricting the flow of buffer gas. As a result, although the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 are connected by the vacuum path 13, differential evacuation is possible, which evacuates each internal space independently.
  • the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 is mainly adjusted.
  • the light source device 100 is provided with a pressure adjustment mechanism that adjusts the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the pressure adjustment mechanism is, for example, a mechanism that adjusts the amount of buffer gas 2 flowing out of the second vacuum chamber 20, or the amount of buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • a flow rate adjustment valve (not shown) that adjusts the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 introduced from the inlet 47 is used as the pressure adjustment mechanism.
  • the pressure adjustment mechanism for example, by increasing the flow rate of the buffer gas 2, the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20 increases, and it is possible to increase the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the second vacuum valve 52 that adjusts the exhaust volume of the second vacuum chamber 20 is used as a pressure adjustment mechanism.
  • the second vacuum valve 52 corresponds to an exhaust volume adjustment valve.
  • both the buffer gas flow rate adjustment valve and the second vacuum valve 52 may be used, or either one may be used. Also, any mechanism other than the above may be used as long as it is capable of adjusting the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the pressure adjustment mechanism for example, it becomes possible to easily adjust the pressure of the second vacuum chamber, making it possible to realize various operating modes.
  • the light source device 100 has a light intensity monitor that detects the amount of EUV light 1.
  • a first light intensity monitor 25a and a second light intensity monitor 25b are provided.
  • the first light intensity monitor 25a is connected to the right side wall 10c of the first vacuum chamber 10, and detects the EUV light 1 that has passed through the rotary foil trap 43. Therefore, the first light intensity monitor 25a functions as a sensor that detects the amount of EUV light 1 from the plasma P, i.e., the emission intensity of the plasma P.
  • the second light intensity monitor 25b is provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 and detects the amount of EUV light 1.
  • the second light intensity monitor 25b is provided at a position where the EUV light that has passed through the optical element 21 (here, a cylindrical collector mirror) is irradiated.
  • the EUV light 1 that has been branched using a reflecting mirror or the like may be detected. This allows the second light intensity monitor 25b to detect the amount of EUV light 1 that has been guided through the collector mirror or reflecting mirror.
  • the detection result of the second light amount monitor 25b functions as a parameter that indicates the degree of contamination of the collector mirror or reflector mirror. Taking advantage of this, the detection result of the second light amount monitor 25b is used to determine whether or not to perform a cleaning operation.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap 43.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap 43.
  • the rotary foil trap 43 has a plurality of foils (blades) F, a central support 60, and an outer ring 61.
  • the central support 60 is connected to a shaft member 63 that rotates around a rotation axis.
  • the multiple foils F are thin films or thin flat plates.
  • the central support 60 is a member that radially supports the multiple foils F.
  • the outer ring 61 is arranged concentrically around the central support 60 and is connected to the tip of each foil F that extends radially from the central support 60.
  • the central support 60 corresponds to a rotating member.
  • Each foil F is radially arranged around the central support 60 at approximately equal angular intervals. At this time, each foil F is on a plane that includes the central axis C0 of the central support 60.
  • the material of the rotating foil trap 43 is, for example, a high-melting point metal such as tungsten (W) or molybdenum (Mo).
  • the multiple foils F of the rotating foil trap 43 are arranged parallel to the light direction of the EUV light 1 so as not to block the EUV light 1 traveling from the plasma P (light-emitting point) to the second vacuum chamber 20. That is, the rotating foil trap 43, in which each foil F is arranged on a plane including the central axis C0 of the central support 60, is arranged so that the plasma P (light-emitting point) is on an extension of the central axis C0 of the central support 60 (see FIG. 11). As a result, except for the central support 60 and the outer ring 61, the EUV light is blocked only by the thickness of each foil F, making it possible to maximize the proportion of EUV light 1 that passes through the rotating foil trap 43 (also called the transmittance).
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap cover 44.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap cover 44.
  • the rotary foil trap cover 44 surrounds the outer periphery of the rotary foil trap 43 and collects debris scattered from the rotary foil trap 43. By providing the rotary foil trap cover 44, it is possible to prevent the debris captured by the rotary foil trap 43 from scattering inside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the rotating foil trap cover 44 has an incident side opening KI, an exit side opening KO, and an exit side opening KO'.
  • the entrance side opening KI is provided at a position where the EUV light entering the rotating foil trap 43 is not blocked.
  • the exit side opening KO is provided at a position where the EUV light 1 passing through the opening 17a of the second partition plate 17 and entering the entrance side opening KI is not blocked.
  • the EUV light 1 that passes through the exit side opening KO becomes the light that is introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the exit side opening KO' is provided at a position where the EUV light 1 that passes through the opening 17b of the second partition plate 17 and entering the entrance side opening KI is not blocked.
  • the EUV light 1 that passes through the exit side opening KO' becomes the light that is introduced into the first light quantity monitor 25a.
  • a through hole 64 is provided on the emission side surface of the rotary foil trap cover 44, through which an axis member 63 serving as the rotation axis of the rotary foil trap 43 passes. Note that the end of the through hole 64 is connected, for example, to the inner wall of the first vacuum chamber 10, and is not an open end.
  • an exhaust pipe 65 for exhausting debris is provided at the bottom of the rotary foil trap cover 44.
  • At least a portion of the debris captured by the rotating foil trap 43 moves radially on the foil F of the rotating foil trap 43 due to centrifugal force, detaches from the end of the foil F, and adheres to the inner surface of the rotating foil trap cover 44.
  • the rotating foil trap cover 44 is heated by a heating means (cover heating section) not shown or by radiation associated with the emission of EUV light, and the debris adhered to the inner surface of the rotating foil trap cover 44 by this heating does not solidify but remains in a liquid state.
  • the debris adhered to the inner surface of the rotating foil trap cover 44 collects at the bottom of the rotating foil trap cover 44 due to gravity, and is discharged outside the rotating foil trap cover 44 via the discharge pipe 65 to become waste material.
  • the debris that has become waste material is stored in a debris storage section not shown.
  • the internal space of the rotary foil trap cover 44 is large enough to accommodate the rotary foil trap 43. This is a size sufficiently larger than the diameter of the exit opening KO that connects to the second vacuum chamber 20. In this way, when viewed from the exit opening KO, the width of the space that becomes the vacuum path 13 (the cross-sectional area that intersects with the path direction) suddenly expands. In addition, the effect of the rotation of the rotary foil trap is also combined, making it possible to suddenly reduce the pressure of the buffer gas 2.
  • [Fixed foil trap] 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap 45.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap 45.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 is a foil trap FT having a plurality of foils F fixed thereto, and is disposed downstream of the rotary foil trap 43 to capture debris that has passed through the rotary foil trap 43.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 is disposed based on a central path through which a ray bundle (EUV extracted light) of the EUV light 1 extracted from the through hole 12 of the first vacuum chamber 10 passes.
  • the central path is, for example, a path connecting the emission point of the plasma P and the center point of the through hole 12.
  • FIG. 7 is a cut through the fixed foil trap 45 along the central path of the EUV light.
  • FIG. 8 is a view of the fixed foil trap 45 viewed from the direction of the central path of the EUV light.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 includes a plurality of foils F arranged in the vacuum path 13, and a fixed frame 66 that fixes the plurality of foils F.
  • the fixed frame 66 corresponds to a fixing member.
  • the multiple foils F are arranged at equal intervals when viewed from the direction of the central path of the EUV light 1.
  • the fixed frame 66 is, for example, rectangular when viewed from the front.
  • the outer shape of the fixed frame 66 may be any shape.
  • the multiple foils F are arranged radially so as to extend in the direction of the beam of the EUV light in a cross section cut along the central path.
  • the multiple foils F of the fixed foil trap 45 serve to reduce the conductance of the portion by finely dividing the space in which the fixed foil trap 45 is disposed.
  • the buffer gas 2 is supplied to the fixed foil trap 45 from the high pressure region 14. The buffer gas 2 is less likely to flow through the fixed foil trap 45 and is therefore more likely to remain between the foils F.
  • High-speed debris that cannot be captured by the rotating foil trap 43 slows down due to an increased probability of collision with the gas trapped in the fixed foil trap 45. Collisions with gas also cause the debris to change direction.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 captures the debris that has slowed down and changed direction in this way using the foil F or fixed frame 66. In this way, by providing the rotating foil trap 43 and the fixed foil trap 45, it is possible to adequately capture the debris.
  • the fixed foil trap 45 since the fixed foil trap 45 has low conductance, it limits the outflow of the buffer gas 2 to the second vacuum chamber 20 and the inflow of the buffer gas 2 from the second vacuum chamber 20. This makes it difficult for the buffer gas 2 in the high pressure region 14 to leak, for example, and also makes it difficult for pressure changes in the second vacuum chamber 20 to affect the pressure in the high pressure region 14. This makes it possible to maintain the high pressure region 14 regardless of the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap cover.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap cover.
  • the fixed foil trap cover 46 is a cover that surrounds the fixed foil trap 45, and is a member that connects the fixed foil trap 45 to the rotary foil trap cover 44.
  • the fixed foil trap cover 46 has a support plate 68 in which an opening 67 and an introduction port 47 are provided, and an enclosure part 69 that extends from the outer edge of the support plate 68 to the EUV light 1 emission side.
  • the support plate 68 is a plate to which the fixed foil trap 45 is fixed.
  • the surrounding portion 69 is formed to surround the side of the fixed foil trap 45.
  • the opening 67 provided in the support plate 68 is the entrance port for the EUV light 1.
  • An inlet 47 for introducing buffer gas 2 is provided inside the support plate 68 so as to communicate with the opening 67.
  • two inlets 47 are provided at positions opposite each other with the opening 67 in between.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example configuration of the debris reduction device 40.
  • the debris reduction device 40 shown in FIG. 11 is configured by assembling the above-mentioned rotating foil trap 43, rotating foil trap cover 44, fixed foil trap 45, and fixed foil trap cover 46.
  • the rotary foil trap 43 is disposed inside the rotary foil trap cover 44.
  • the support plate 68 of the fixed foil trap cover 46 is connected to the rear of the rotary foil trap cover 44 so that the exit side opening KO and the opening 67 overlap with each other.
  • the fixed frame 66 of the fixed foil trap 45 is connected so as to cover the opening 67 of the support plate 68.
  • the rear end of the fixed foil trap cover 46 is connected to the through hole 22 of the second vacuum chamber 20 via a flange or the like (not shown).
  • the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 are connected by a vacuum path 13 that passes through a high pressure region 14 inside the debris reduction device 40.
  • a vacuum path 13 that passes through a high pressure region 14 inside the debris reduction device 40.
  • Fig. 12 is a graph showing the results of a simulation of the pressure inside the light source device. For this simulation, a model of the debris mitigation device 40 shown in Fig. 11 was created, and the pressure distribution in the model was calculated.
  • Fig. 12 shows a pressure profile along the central path O of the EUV light 1.
  • the horizontal axis of the graph is the distance along the central path O.
  • a relative distance with respect to the distance D from the plasma P to the measurement end inside the second vacuum chamber 20 is used.
  • the vertical axis of the graph represents pressure [Pa] at each position.
  • Point Oa on the graph corresponds to the generation position of plasma P.
  • Point Ob corresponds to the entrance end of vacuum path 13 (entrance side opening KI of rotary foil trap cover 44).
  • Point Oc corresponds to high pressure region 14 (opening 67 of support plate 68).
  • Point Od corresponds to the exit end of vacuum path 13 (rear end of fixed foil trap 45).
  • FIG. 12 shows the pressure profile (solid line graph) when the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to 0.7 Pa, and the pressure profile (dotted line graph) when P2 is set to 5 Pa.
  • the simulation was performed with the exhaust volume of the first vacuum pump 54 that evacuates the first vacuum chamber 10 and the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 set to constant values. As a result, the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 became 3 Pa.
  • high pressure is maintained in the shaded area centered on point Oc.
  • This shaded area is high pressure area 14.
  • a fixed foil trap 45 is provided from the high pressure region 14 to point Od on the second vacuum chamber 20 side, and the pressure drops almost uniformly.
  • a rotary foil trap cover 44 including a rotary foil trap 43 is provided from the high pressure region 14 to point Ob on the first vacuum chamber 10 side, and the pressure also drops toward point Ob.
  • the part where the pressure gradient is bent corresponds to the end of the entrance side of the rotary foil trap 43.
  • the drop in pressure up to point Ob occurs due to the sudden expansion of the buffer gas 2 inside the rotary foil trap cover 44.
  • the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 increases from 0.7 Pa to 5 Pa.
  • the pressure Ph in the high pressure region 14 increases slightly as P2 increases.
  • the increase in Ph is about 0.5 Pa, which is about 1/8 of the increase in P2 (4.3 Pa).
  • the change in Ph is sufficiently small compared to the change in P2.
  • the change in pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is almost entirely absorbed by the gas diffusion effect in the high pressure region 14 and the rotary foil trap 43, and is not easily transmitted to the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the pressure distribution from the high pressure region 14 to the first vacuum chamber 10 side hardly changes.
  • the pressure from point Oa to point Ob (the pressure from the plasma P to the entrance end of the debris mitigation device 40) is approximately constant (about 3 Pa) regardless of whether P2 increases or decreases.
  • the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 is approximately constant, regardless of the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the debris reduction device 40 can separate P1 and P2 by generating a high pressure region 14 that blocks the vacuum path 13. As a result, it is possible to suppress changes in pressure P1 on the light source side caused by changes in pressure P2 on the EUV light introduction side.
  • the pressure Ph of the high pressure region 14 it is preferable to set the pressure Ph of the high pressure region 14 to a pressure that is six times or more the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10. This makes it possible to reliably maintain the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 while adequately capturing debris from the plasma P.
  • FIG. 13 is a graph showing the relationship between the pressures of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • FIG. 13 shows the relationship between the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20, which were actually measured in the light source device 100.
  • the vertical axis of the graph is P1
  • the horizontal axis is P2.
  • the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was changed while keeping the exhaust volume of the first vacuum chamber 10 constant so that P1 was approximately 2 Pa.
  • the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 showed a value of around 2 Pa. In other words, even though the pressure was high on the downstream side across the debris reduction device 40, the pressure in the upstream space where the plasma P was generated hardly changed from the set value. In other words, it was found that the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 where the plasma P was generated could be kept constant regardless of whether the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was high or low.
  • the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 supplied to the high pressure region 14 was set to approximately the same as the flow rate used in the simulation shown in FIG. 12.
  • the pressure Ph of the high pressure region 14 is approximately 20 Pa. Therefore, it can be said that the debris mitigation device 40 does not substantially change the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10 when the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber changes at least within a range below the pressure of the high pressure region Ph. This makes it possible to sufficiently maintain the pressure of the first vacuum chamber, for example, even if the pressure of the second vacuum chamber changes.
  • the optical system that handles the EUV light 1 can become contaminated by debris dispersed from the plasma P and carbon-based deposits (carbon contamination), which can degrade its performance.
  • high-speed debris flying inside the chamber can collide with the optical system, potentially scraping off the reflective film on the surface of the optical system.
  • a method is known in which high-speed debris is reduced by colliding it with buffer gas 2, for example.
  • a method is known in which debris and carbon contamination that has adhered to the optical system can be removed by using radicals from active gases, etc.
  • the inventors have studied a method of protecting the optical elements 21 and other elements downstream of the debris mitigation device 40 (DMT) by utilizing the pressure distribution of the argon gas, which is the buffer gas 2.
  • DMT debris mitigation device 40
  • this method for example, low-speed debris is captured by a rotating foil trap 43, and high-speed debris is decelerated by the buffer gas 2 and captured by a fixed foil trap 45.
  • debris that is not captured by the debris mitigation device 40 may enter the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • high-speed debris may collide with the optical element 21 downstream of the debris mitigation device 40, causing the optical element 21 to be sputtered.
  • the argon gas pressure around the optical element 21 was increased in the hope of suppressing sputtering of the optical element 21 due to debris, but it was found that this actually promoted sputtering of the optical element 21.
  • sputtering occurs by introducing argon gas. It is believed that this is because argon gas ionized by the EUV light 1 collides with the optical element 21, causing the surface of the optical element 21 to be sputtered.
  • argon gas is ionized by irradiation with the EUV light 1 to form plasma (EUV-induced plasma).
  • EUV-induced plasma plasma
  • argon ions are accelerated toward the optical element 21, and the ions collide with the surface of the optical element 21 to cause sputtering. It is believed that the ions are accelerated because of a potential difference between the EUV-induced plasma and the optical element 21.
  • sputtering by ionized gas can be achieved by using an ionized gas (argon gas in this case) that is ionized by the EUV light 1 as the buffer gas 2.
  • argon gas ionized gas in this case
  • the results of the sputtering experiment are described below.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of samples used in a sputtering experiment.
  • a sample 27 for sputtering was arranged on a stage 26 arranged downstream of a debris mitigation device 40.
  • the sample 27 was a sample on which a thin film of ruthenium (Ru) was formed, and the sputtering rate for the sample 27 was measured.
  • the thin film of ruthenium is a material used for a reflective surface that reflects, for example, EUV light 1.
  • the tilt angle of the stage 26 with respect to the central path O of the EUV light 1 is set to approximately 20°.
  • the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 pressure in the area on the left side of the debris mitigation device 40 in the figure) where the plasma P that radiates the EUV light 1 is generated is set to approximately 2 Pa.
  • the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 pressure in the area on the left side of the debris mitigation device 40 in the figure) where the sample 27 is placed is set in the range of approximately 0.5 Pa to approximately 11 Pa.
  • the tilt angle of the stage 26 with respect to the central path O of the EUV light 1 was set between about 25° and about 45°.
  • the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 was set to about 2 Pa, as in FIG. 14A.
  • the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 was set in the range of about 13 Pa to about 19 Pa.
  • One sample 27 (referred to as Sample 6) was placed on the stage 26 so that it was irradiated with the EUV light 1.
  • the distance between the plasma P and the end of Sample 6 on the plasma P side was set to about 35 cm, as in the case of Sample 1 in FIG. 14A.
  • the 15 is a graph showing the relationship between the sputtering rate and pressure.
  • the horizontal axis of the graph is the pressure P2 [Pa] of the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the vertical axis of the graph is the sputtering rate.
  • the unit of the sputtering rate is nm/Gpulse. This represents the film thickness (nm) sputtered when the number of times the plasma P emits light (the number of power pulses) is 1 ⁇ 10 9 times.
  • the points other than the rightmost point are results obtained by evaluating the sputtering rate for Sample 1 shown in FIG. 14A, and are results at an inclination angle of about 20°.
  • the sputtering rate was evaluated when the tilt angle was set to about 25°.
  • the distance from the plasma P to each point was set to about 35 cm.
  • the sputtering rate for the ruthenium thin film does not change significantly even when the pressure is changed, and is approximately 5 nm/Gpulse or less.
  • P2 is 6 Pa or more
  • Figure 16 is a graph showing the relationship between sputter rate, pressure, and sample position.
  • Figure 17 is a graph showing the relationship between the sputter rate and the emission frequency of the plasma.
  • Figure 17 shows the frequency dependency of the sputter rate on the emission frequency of the plasma P (EUV light 1).
  • the sputter rate was measured with emission frequencies of 3000 Hz and 6000 Hz.
  • the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was set to approximately 13 Pa, and the inclination angle of the sample 27 was set to approximately 25°.
  • the emission frequency when the emission frequency is set low, setting the P2 value to the same pressure as when the emission frequency is high will slow down the sputtering speed. In such a case, P2 can be increased to ensure sufficient cleaning speed. Conversely, when it is difficult to adjust P2, the sputtering rate can be changed by adjusting the emission frequency.
  • the sputtering phenomenon caused by the ionized gas (buffer gas 2) ionized by the EUV light 1 has the effect of scraping the surface of the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 in the light source device 100.
  • the optical element 21 can be sputter cleaned.
  • the inventors focused on this point and equipped the light source device 100 with the function of performing a cleaning operation using an ionized gas, which is the buffer gas 2, in addition to the normal operation of supplying the EUV light 1 to the utilization device, etc.
  • the light source device 100 is capable of both normal operation and cleaning operation.
  • Normal operation is, for example, an operation in which plasma P (EUV light 1) is stably generated and EUV light 1 is supplied to a utilization device or the like.
  • normal operation is an operation in which the light source device 100 operates as a light source of EUV light 1, which is its original purpose.
  • the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 during normal operation may be referred to as normal pressure P2n.
  • normal pressure P2n corresponds to the first pressure.
  • the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 during normal operation is set to a pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable.
  • P0 is typically a pressure at which the plasma P is stably generated, and is, for example, about 2 Pa.
  • the specific value of P0 is not limited.
  • a pressure at which the plasma P can be stably generated may be set to P0 depending on the type of plasma raw material, discharge conditions, etc.
  • the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable corresponds to the third pressure.
  • the cleaning operation is different from the normal operation in that it cleans the optical elements by sputtering.
  • the normal operation and the cleaning operation are switched between as appropriate.
  • the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 during the cleaning operation may be referred to as the cleaning pressure P2c.
  • the cleaning pressure P2c corresponds to the second pressure.
  • the light source device 100 it is possible to change only the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 (the pressure around the optical element 21) while maintaining the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10. By utilizing this characteristic, it is possible to control the amount of sputtering on the optical element 21 without changing the pressure P1 on the plasma P side.
  • the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 becomes contaminated with debris flying in from the plasma P, which is the light source, it is possible to clean the optical element 21 by changing the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 while the light source is turned on in the first vacuum chamber 10, thereby scraping off the debris adhering to the optical element 21 through the sputtering phenomenon.
  • the light source device 100 can clean the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 while stably generating, for example, EUV light 1.
  • the cleaning operation involves introducing buffer gas 2 into the second vacuum chamber 20, which is maintained at normal pressure P2n, which is the pressure during normal operation, increasing the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 to a cleaning pressure P2c that is higher than the normal pressure P2n, and, while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c, sputtering the optical element 21 placed in the second vacuum chamber 20 with the buffer gas 2 ionized by the EUV light 1.
  • the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 changes, the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 hardly changes due to the action of the high pressure region 14 of the debris reduction device 40, and is maintained at the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable. Therefore, when starting a cleaning operation or returning to normal operation, there is no need to adjust the exhaust volume of the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the cleaning pressure P2c is set to 6 Pa or more.
  • the sputtering rate increases in accordance with the pressure. Therefore, by setting the cleaning pressure P2c in the range of 6 Pa or more, it is possible to perform sputtering at a desired sputtering rate, for example.
  • the cleaning pressure P2c is set to a pressure of at least three times the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable, which is set in the first vacuum chamber 10. For example, if P2c is at the same pressure as P0, it is difficult to achieve a sufficient sputtering rate, but by setting the pressure at least three times higher, a relatively high sputtering rate can be achieved. This makes it possible, for example, to shorten the cleaning time for the optical element 21.
  • the normal pressure P2n of the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to, for example, a pressure equivalent to the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable. In this case, it is possible to sufficiently lower the sputtering rate, and a state in which no significant sputtering occurs during normal operation can be maintained. This makes it possible to avoid situations in which the optical element 21 is unnecessarily sputtered during normal operation.
  • the optical element 21 is sputtered while the second vacuum chamber 20 is maintained at the cleaning pressure P2c.
  • the sputtering time is calculated based on the sputtering rate according to the cleaning pressure P2c and the desired amount of sputtering.
  • the cleaning pressure P2c is then maintained for the sputtering time.
  • the sputtering process may also include a process of changing the amount of EUV light 1 from the amount of EUV light 1 during normal operation while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c.
  • the sputtering rate can also be adjusted when the amount of EUV light 1 (average power) is changed. Therefore, in this process, any parameter that can change the amount of EUV light 1 is adjusted.
  • the emission frequency may be adjusted as in the case of FIG. 17.
  • the emission frequency may be increased.
  • the irradiation intensity of the laser beam LB may be adjusted, or the pulse power (charging energy) applied to the discharge electrodes EA and EB may be adjusted. By increasing the irradiation intensity or pulse power of the laser beam, it is possible to increase the sputtering rate.
  • the sputtering rate may be increased by moving the position of the optical element 21 closer to the plasma.
  • the sputtering rate can be adjusted by changing the tilt angle of the sample 27. That is, in order to adjust the sputtering rate, the irradiation angle of the EUV light 1 with respect to the optical element 21, etc. may be adjusted. In this case, the sputtering rate can be reduced by making the irradiation angle shallower.
  • the types of parameters that are adjusted in the sputtering process are not limited.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the light source device 100.
  • the process shown in Fig. 18 is a process for executing the cleaning method according to the present embodiment. In the following, an example of cleaning the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 will be described.
  • the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b (see FIG. 2), which detects the amount of EUV light 1 that has passed through the optical element 21, is used to determine whether or not to perform the cleaning operation. That is, in the process shown in FIG. 18, normal operation and cleaning operation are switched and performed based on the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b.
  • the process shown in FIG. 18 may be performed automatically using a controller of the light source device 100.
  • the pressure and the like are automatically controlled based on the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b.
  • the user of the light source device 100 may manually control the pressure and the like by checking the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b.
  • the controller may also read the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b and output an instruction to the user to perform a cleaning operation.
  • step 101 normal operation is performed (step 101).
  • the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 is set to a pressure P0 that stabilizes the EUV light 1.
  • the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to a normal pressure P2n. This allows stable EUV light 1 to be supplied to a utilization device, etc.
  • step 102 it is determined whether or not to start the cleaning operation (step 102). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b (light amount of the EUV light 1 that has passed through the optical element 21) is lower than a predetermined threshold (start determination threshold).
  • the start determination threshold is, for example, the lower limit of the light amount of the EUV light 1 supplied to the utilization device, etc. in normal operation. There are no other limitations on the method of setting the start determination threshold. In this embodiment, the start determination threshold corresponds to the first threshold.
  • the process returns to step 101 and normal operation continues.
  • a pressure increase step is executed to increase the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 (step 103).
  • the pressure increase process is a process in which, while plasma P is being generated, an ionized gas (buffer gas 2) that is ionized by EUV light 1 is introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20, which is maintained at normal pressure P2n, which is the pressure during normal operation, and the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is increased to a cleaning pressure P2c that is higher than the normal pressure P2n.
  • the flow rate control valve may be adjusted so that the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20 is increased.
  • a sputtering process is performed to sputter the optical element 21 (step 104).
  • the sputtering process is a process in which the optical element 21, which is the target placed in the second vacuum chamber 20, is sputtered with the buffer gas 2 ionized by the EUV light 1 while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c.
  • the surface of the optical element 21 is sputtered at a sputtering rate according to P2c, and debris and the like are removed.
  • a process may be performed in which the amount of EUV light 1 is changed from the amount of EUV light 1 during normal operation while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c.
  • the light intensity adjustment process is a process of adjusting parameters (such as the emission frequency of EUV light 1, the brightness of the laser beam LB, and the pulse power) that can change the amount of EUV light 1 so as to obtain, for example, a desired sputtering rate.
  • the method for adjusting the sputtering rate is not limited to a specific one.
  • the position (distance from the plasma P) or the attitude (irradiation angle of the EUV light 1) of the optical element 21 may be adjusted.
  • the pressure increase process and the sputtering process are executed when the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b becomes lower than the start determination threshold. This makes it possible to perform the cleaning operation (pressure increase process and sputtering process) at the timing when cleaning of the optical element 21 becomes necessary. It also makes it possible to avoid unnecessary cleaning operations.
  • step 105 it is determined whether or not to end the cleaning operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b is higher than a predetermined threshold (end determination threshold).
  • the end determination threshold is set to a value equal to or greater than the start determination threshold described above. In this embodiment, the end determination threshold corresponds to the second threshold.
  • the appropriate value of the amount of EUV light 1 supplied to the utilization device during normal operation is set as the end judgment threshold.
  • the upper limit value of the amount of EUV light 1 may be set as the end judgment threshold.
  • the same value as the start judgment threshold may be set as the end judgment threshold. There are no other limitations on the method of setting the end judgment threshold.
  • step 105 If the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b is lower than the end judgment threshold, it is determined that dirt remains on the optical element 21 and the cleaning operation is not to be ended (No in step 105). In this case, the process returns to step 104 and the sputtering process continues.
  • a pressure reduction step is executed to reduce the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 (step 106).
  • the pressure reduction process is a process in which the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is reduced to the normal pressure P2n when the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b becomes higher than the end determination threshold.
  • the flow control valve may be adjusted so that the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20 is reduced.
  • This process can be said to be a process of returning, for example, the second vacuum valve 52 and the flow rate control valve to their normal operating states. Note that if the parameters for changing the amount of EUV light 1 or the position and attitude of the optical element 21 are adjusted during the sputtering process, they are returned to their normal operating states. This makes it possible to end the cleaning operation and return to normal operation.
  • step 107 it is determined whether or not to stop the operation of the light source device 100 (step 107). For example, if the operation is to be stopped for maintenance or the like (Yes in step 107), the light source device 100 is stopped. If the operation is not to be stopped (No in step 107), the process returns to step 101 and normal operation is resumed.
  • the cleaning operation is an operation that changes the pressure downstream of the debris reduction device 40 in which the optical element 21 is placed (pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20).
  • pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 the pressure in the space where the emission point of the plasma P is located upstream of the debris reduction device 40 (pressure P2 in the first vacuum chamber 10) does not change.
  • pressure P2 in the first vacuum chamber 10 the pressure in the space where the emission point of the plasma P is located upstream of the debris reduction device 40
  • [Sputter area and mask usage] 19 is a schematic diagram for explaining a sputtering region where sputtering occurs.
  • a region (sputtering region 70) where sputtering occurs due to a buffer gas 2 irradiated with EUV light 1 will be explained using the schematic diagram.
  • the sputtering region 70 refers to a region where the surface of a sample 27 is actually etched by the sputtering phenomenon.
  • the diagram on the left side of Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing the state of sample 27 before it is sputtered.
  • plate-shaped sample 27 was fixed with bolts to stage 26 which was introduced into second vacuum chamber 20.
  • a thin film of tungsten (W) with an oxidized surface was used as sample 27.
  • the tungsten oxide formed on the surface of sample 27 was black with no metallic luster.
  • the color of tungsten oxide is diagrammatically shown as dark gray.
  • the dotted area in the diagram represents the optical path of the EUV light 1.
  • the sample 27 was placed at the end of the optical path of the EUV light 1 (irradiation range of the EUV light 1), and the EUV light 1 was irradiated only to the left half of the sample 27, without using a light-shielding member that would generate impurities.
  • the diagram on the right side of Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing the state of sample 27 after sputtering.
  • the black color of tungsten oxide remained.
  • a metallic luster was confirmed in the left half of sample 27, which was irradiated with EUV light 1.
  • tungsten oxide was etched in the area irradiated with EUV light 1.
  • the color of the tungsten exposed after the tungsten oxide was removed is shown as light gray.
  • the light gray area of sample 27 becomes the sputtered area 70.
  • the area irradiated with the EUV light 1 becomes the sputtering area 70 where etching by sputtering occurs. It was also found that even inside the second vacuum chamber 20, in areas not irradiated with the EUV light 1, etching by sputtering hardly occurs at all. In other words, it is possible to limit the sputtering area 70 by limiting the irradiation of the EUV light 1. Below, a configuration for limiting the irradiation of the EUV light 1 by using a light shielding plate will be described.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of an optical system that uses a light shielding plate.
  • the optical system 24a shown in Figure 20 is an optical system that collects the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P and passed through the debris reduction device 40.
  • the left side of the debris reduction device 40 is the space in the first vacuum chamber 10 where the plasma P is generated, and the right side of the debris reduction device 40 is the space in the second vacuum chamber 20 where the optical system 24a is located.
  • the optical system 24a has a cylindrical collecting mirror 71a and a light shielding plate 72a.
  • the collecting mirror 71a is an example of an optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the optical system 24a is configured by adding a light shielding plate 72a to the light source device 100 described with reference to FIG. 2, for example.
  • the collector mirror 71a has a rotationally symmetric cylindrical reflective surface on the inside, and is positioned so that the central axis of the reflective surface coincides with the central path O of the EUV light 1.
  • the collector mirror 71a is supported so that it can rotate around the central path O.
  • the light shielding plate 72a is a plate-shaped member that shields a portion of the EUV light that passes through the debris mitigation device 40 and heads toward the collector mirror 71a.
  • the light shielding plate 72a is positioned so as to cover the upper half of the area on the collector mirror 71a where the EUV light 1 is incident. Note that a light shielding plate 72a that covers 2/3 of the area on which the EUV light 1 is incident, or a light shielding plate 72a that covers 3/4 of the area may also be used.
  • the EUV light 1 that has passed through the debris mitigation device 40 and is not blocked by the light shielding plate 72a and is incident on the collector mirror 71a is collected.
  • the reflective surface of the collector mirror 71a that is irradiated with the EUV light 1 is etched by the buffer gas 2. This may cause deterioration of the reflective surface over time.
  • the reflective surface that is shielded by the light shielding plate 72a is not etched by the buffer gas 2, so the reflective surface can be maintained without deterioration.
  • the collector mirror 71a can be rotated to use an undegraded reflective surface. Furthermore, since the collector mirror 71a rotates around the central path O as an axis, the optical path of the EUV light 1 is not changed by the rotation of the collector mirror 71a. This makes it possible to maintain the collection performance without replacing the collector mirror 71a, making it possible, for example, to extend the maintenance period.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of an optical system using a light shielding plate.
  • the optical system 24b shown in FIG. 21 is an optical system that is provided, for example, in the first vacuum chamber 10, and collects the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P.
  • the optical system 24b has a concave collector mirror 71b and a light shielding plate 72b.
  • the collector mirror 71b has a concave reflective surface formed, for example, by a curved surface of revolution, and is disposed with the reflective surface facing the plasma P.
  • the collector mirror 71b is supported so as to be rotatable about a central axis C of the reflective surface.
  • the collector mirror 71b may be composed of multiple mirrors as long as the focusing position of the EUV light 1 does not change when the collector mirror 71b rotates about the central axis C.
  • the light shielding plate 72b blocks a portion of the EUV light traveling from the plasma P toward the collector mirror 71b.
  • the light shielding plate 72b is disposed so as to cover the lower half of the reflecting surface of the collecting mirror 71b, but the range of the reflecting surface covered by the light shielding plate 72b is not limited.
  • the collecting mirror 71b can be rotated to use an undegraded reflecting surface, as in the case of FIG. 20. This makes it possible to maintain the collecting performance without replacing the collecting mirror 71b.
  • the debris reduction device 40 forms a vacuum path 13 connecting the first vacuum chamber 10, which generates the plasma P, and the second vacuum chamber 20, into which the EUV light 1 from the plasma P is introduced. Furthermore, a high-pressure region 14, whose pressure is higher than the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20, is formed so as to block the vacuum path 13. This allows, for example, pressure changes in the second vacuum chamber 20 to be absorbed by the high-pressure region 14. This makes it possible to suppress changes in pressure P1 on the light source side due to changes in pressure P2 on the introduction side of the EUV light 1.
  • a high-pressure region 14 that enables differential pumping is formed inside the debris mitigation device 40.
  • changes in pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20, which is the introduction side of the EUV light 1 are absorbed by the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 in the high-pressure region 14, and do not affect the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10, which is the light source area where the plasma P is generated.
  • the debris mitigation device 40 that generates the high-pressure region 14 also maintains the function of reducing debris from the plasma P.
  • the characteristic of the light source device 100 that allows the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 to be changed while stably supplying the EUV light 1 is utilized to perform sputter cleaning of the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the sputtering rate for example, by increasing or decreasing the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20.
  • the device is operated under conditions that make sputtering less likely.
  • the pressure can be deliberately set to perform sputtering, making it possible to etch and clean the contaminated surface.
  • the sputtering rate can also be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the emission output (amount of EUV light 1) in the first vacuum chamber 10. Also, by changing the position and attitude of the optical element 21, it is possible to improve unevenness in sputtering. It is also possible to place a shield in front of the optical element 21 to limit the area to be sputtered.
  • a rare gas (typically argon gas) that has relatively little absorption of the EUV light 1 is used as the ionized gas that generates this sputtering phenomenon.
  • the ionized gas can be used as the buffer gas 2 because it hardly reduces the amount of light of the EUV light 1.
  • the gas that can be used as the buffer gas 2 can be used as the ionized gas that generates sputtering. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated gas for cleaning optical elements, etc., making it possible to simplify the system configuration and reduce equipment and running costs.
  • one method for cleaning the optical system of the EUV light 1 is chemical cleaning using a highly explosive gas or a highly reactive gas.
  • a highly explosive gas or a highly reactive gas for example, in Patent Document 2, in an extreme ultraviolet light source using metal vapor, reactive gases such as hydrogen gas or halogen gas are supplied to the foil trap or downstream thereafter. The reactive gas is then excited using vacuum ultraviolet light generated from the light source or ultraviolet light generated from a dedicated ultraviolet light source, and the optical elements are cleaned.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13054 describes a method of cleaning an optical system using an inert gas in a projection exposure apparatus equipped with an EUV light source. This method involves cooling an inert gas such as nitrogen gas, spraying the liquid or solid inert gas onto optical elements, and cleaning contaminants that have adhered to the optical elements due to the impact.
  • an inert gas such as nitrogen gas
  • the sputtering phenomenon discovered by the present inventors makes it possible to perform sputtering (etching) using an inert ionized gas (buffer gas 2) such as a rare gas.
  • buffer gas 2 such as a rare gas.
  • the light source device 100 does not require a mechanism for processing reactive gases or a mechanism for removing reactive gases. This makes it possible to significantly reduce device costs compared to devices that use reactive gases.
  • the device configuration is simplified, making it possible to configure the device compactly.
  • ionized gases do not cause corrosion like active gases. This allows a relatively wide range of materials to be selected for the container, etc., making it possible to reduce device costs.
  • the ionized gas can be a gas that has low absorption of the EUV light 1. This makes it possible to clean components downstream of the debris mitigation device 40 without dimming the EUV light 1. As a result, for example, a relatively high sputtering rate can be achieved, and cleaning can be completed in a short time.
  • an LDP type light source unit which uses a laser beam LB and discharge to turn the plasma raw material into plasma.
  • any type may be used as long as it generates radiant light from plasma.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of an LPP type light source unit.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of an LPP type light source unit 80 that directly converts plasma raw material into plasma using a laser beam LB.
  • the light source unit 80 has a rotor 81 arranged in the first vacuum chamber 10, a container C that supplies plasma raw material S to the rotor 81, and a laser source 82 that irradiates a laser beam LB that converts the plasma raw material S supplied to the rotor 81 into plasma.
  • the container C corresponds to the raw material supply unit
  • the laser source 82 corresponds to the energy beam incidence unit.
  • the rotor 81 transports the plasma raw material S to a region where the plasma P is generated.
  • the main surface of the disk-shaped rotor 81 is irradiated with a laser beam LB. This irradiation position is the position where the plasma P is generated.
  • the rotor 81 is supported so as to be rotatable along the vertical direction.
  • the rotor 81 may be disposed in a state inclined from the vertical direction.
  • the shape of the rotor 81 is not limited to a disk shape, and for example, a polygonal rotor may be used.
  • the rotor 81 is made of a high melting point metal such as tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo), or tantalum (Ta).
  • the container C is arranged so that the lower part of the rotor 81 is immersed therein, and supplies liquid plasma raw material S to the rotor 81.
  • the plasma raw material S contained in the container C adheres to the surface of the rotor 81.
  • the plasma raw material S is supplied to the irradiation position of the laser beam LB.
  • the laser beam LB is incident on the irradiation position, plasma P is generated and radiation such as EUV light is emitted.
  • the light source unit 80 in which part of the rotating body 81 is immersed in the container C, can, for example, make the light source module thinner.
  • the LPP type requires only one rotating body and does not require equipment for supplying pulsed power. This makes it possible to miniaturize the device and reduce the device costs.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of an LPP type light source unit.
  • the light source unit 90 shown in FIG. 23 is provided in the first vacuum chamber 10 and includes a rotating drum 91 that rotates while storing liquid plasma raw material S.
  • the light source unit 90 is an LPP type light source module that converts the plasma raw material S stored in the rotating drum 91 into plasma using a laser beam LB.
  • the rotating drum 91 has a storage section 92 that opens upward and stores liquid plasma raw material S.
  • the plasma raw material S is supplied to the storage section 92 in liquid or solid state from a raw material supply section (not shown).
  • the rotating drum 91 is also provided with a heating mechanism (not shown) to maintain the plasma raw material S supplied to the storage section 92 in a liquid state.
  • the heating mechanism used is a heater that directly heats the rotating drum 91 using an electric heating wire or the like. Alternatively, a heater that heats the rotating drum 91 from the outside using radiation or the like may be used.
  • the rotating drum 91 has a disk-shaped base 93 and an annular outer wall portion 94 formed on one side of the base 93 along the periphery of the base 93.
  • the area surrounded by the base 93 and the outer wall portion 94 becomes a storage portion 92 that stores liquid plasma raw material S.
  • a shaft member 95 that rotates around a predetermined rotation axis is connected to the side of the rotating drum 91 opposite the side on which the storage portion 92 is formed, so that the central axis of the rotating drum 91 coincides with the rotation axis.
  • the shaft member 95 is rotated by a motor (not shown).
  • the liquid plasma raw material S supplied to the storage section 92 moves toward the inner surface 94a of the outer wall section 94 due to centrifugal force and is distributed along the inner surface 94a.
  • the film thickness of the liquid plasma raw material S distributed on the inner surface 94a is adjusted according to the rotation speed of the rotor.
  • the rotating drum 91 stores the liquid plasma raw material S on the inner circumferential surface 94a of the storage section 92.
  • the inner circumferential surface 94a of the storage section 92 is irradiated with a laser beam LB that converts the liquid plasma raw material S into plasma. This generates plasma P at the irradiation position of the laser beam LB, and radiant light such as EUV light is emitted.
  • a light source section 90 of the type that uses a rotating drum 91 as a rotating body there is no need to provide, for example, a container for storing a large amount of plasma raw material. This makes it possible to reduce the power required to heat the plasma raw material.
  • a debris reduction device equipped with both a rotating foil trap and a fixed foil trap has been described.
  • the configuration of the debris reduction device is not limited, and any configuration may be used as long as it is capable of generating a high pressure region to interrupt the vacuum path formed within the device.
  • the member disposed on the second vacuum chamber side of the debris mitigation apparatus may be used as the member disposed on the second vacuum chamber side of the debris mitigation apparatus, such as a member having a mesh structure or a honeycomb structure that reduces conductance.
  • a member for narrowing the vacuum path and lowering the conductance may be used.
  • the rotating foil trap and rotating foil trap cover do not need to be placed on the first vacuum chamber side of the debris reduction device.
  • a configuration has been described in which a buffer gas is used as the ionized gas that generates sputtering.
  • the buffer gas and the ionized gas may be different types of gas.
  • an inert gas such as nitrogen or helium may be used as the buffer gas
  • a rare gas such as argon gas
  • the ionized gas for example, during normal operation, a high pressure region may be generated with the buffer gas (nitrogen, helium, etc.), and an ionized gas (argon, etc.) may be released into the second vacuum chamber only when a cleaning operation is performed. Even with a configuration in which an ionized gas is introduced when necessary in this way, it is possible to clean optical elements, etc. by utilizing sputtering with the ionized gas.
  • the debris reduction device 30 is provided inside the first vacuum chamber 10.
  • the location where the debris reduction device is provided is not limited.
  • the debris reduction device may be provided outside the first vacuum chamber and the second vacuum chamber.
  • the debris reduction device is provided so as to connect the outer wall of the first vacuum chamber and the outer wall of the second vacuum chamber.
  • the debris reduction device may also be provided inside the second vacuum chamber.
  • a method for performing sputtering using radiation from plasma and ionized gas was described using a light source device equipped with a debris reduction device that generates a high-pressure region on a vacuum path, but the configuration of the device for performing sputtering using radiation and ionized gas is not limited.
  • the debris reduction device does not necessarily need to form a vacuum path.
  • the vacuum path connecting the space where plasma is generated (first vacuum chamber) and the space where the synchrotron radiation is introduced (second vacuum chamber) is composed of a separate member from the debris reduction device.
  • the debris reduction device is appropriately positioned on the optical path of the synchrotron radiation. Even with such a light source device, it is possible to perform sputtering using synchrotron radiation and ionized gas by releasing ionized gas into the space where the synchrotron radiation is introduced.
  • the configuration of the light source device for performing sputtering and the configuration of the debris reduction device mounted on the light source device are not limited, and for example, any device capable of releasing ionized gas into the area irradiated with synchrotron radiation can be used to generate the above-mentioned sputtering phenomenon.
  • expressions using "more than”, such as “greater than A” and “smaller than A”, are expressions that comprehensively include both concepts that include equivalent to A and concepts that do not include equivalent to A.
  • “greater than A” is not limited to cases that do not include equivalent to A, but also includes “A or greater”.
  • “smaller than A” is not limited to “less than A” but also includes “A or less”.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Plasma & Fusion (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • X-Ray Techniques (AREA)
  • Exposure Of Semiconductors, Excluding Electron Or Ion Beam Exposure (AREA)
  • Cleaning In General (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a light source apparatus capable of suppressing a change in pressure on a light source side due to a change in pressure on an introduction side of radiation light; and a cleaning method. A light source apparatus according to one embodiment of the present invention is provided with a first vacuum chamber, a light source unit, and a debris reduction device. The light source unit generates plasma which serves as a light source in the first vacuum chamber. The debris reduction device reduces debris dissipated from the plasma. The debris reduction device forms a vacuum path that allows radiation light emitted from the plasma to pass therethrough, and that connects the first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber into which the radiation light is introduced, and generates a high-pressure region whose pressure is higher than the pressure of the first vacuum chamber and the pressure of the second vacuum chamber so as to block the vacuum path.

Description

光源装置及びクリーニング方法Light source device and cleaning method

 本発明は、プラズマを光源に用いた光源装置及びクリーニング方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a light source device that uses plasma as a light source and a cleaning method.

 従来、プラズマを光源として放射光を発生させる光源装置が開発されている。例えばプラズマ原料の種類やプラズマを発生させるための励起エネルギーを適宜選択することで、X線領域の放射光が得られる。このような放射光のうち、例えば波長の短いX線は、X線写真撮影、非破壊検査、X線解析、X線分光等の様々な用途に使用される。また、近年では、軟X線領域にある波長13.5nmの極端紫外光(以下、「EUV(Extreme Ultra Violet)光」ともいう)が、露光光や検査光として使用されている。 Conventionally, light source devices have been developed that generate synchrotron radiation using plasma as a light source. For example, synchrotron radiation in the X-ray region can be obtained by appropriately selecting the type of plasma raw material and the excitation energy for generating the plasma. Among such synchrotron radiation, for example, X-rays with short wavelengths are used for various purposes such as X-ray photography, non-destructive testing, X-ray analysis, and X-ray spectroscopy. In recent years, extreme ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 13.5 nm (hereinafter referred to as "EUV (Extreme Ultra Violet) light") in the soft X-ray region has also been used as exposure light and inspection light.

 一般にEUV光源装置としては、DPP(Discharge Produced Plasma)光源装置、LDP(Laser Assisted Discharge Produced Plasma)光源装置、及びLPP(Laser Produced Plasma)光源装置が挙げられる。 Typical EUV light source devices include DPP (Discharge Produced Plasma) light source devices, LDP (Laser Assisted Discharge Produced Plasma) light source devices, and LPP (Laser Produced Plasma) light source devices.

 DPP光源装置は、EUV放射種を含む気体状のプラズマ原料(放電ガス)が供給された電極間に高電圧を印加して、放電により高密度高温プラズマを生成し、そこから放射される極端紫外光を利用するものである。 The DPP light source device applies a high voltage between electrodes to which gaseous plasma raw material (discharge gas) containing EUV radiation species is supplied, generating a high-density, high-temperature plasma through discharge, and utilizes the extreme ultraviolet light emitted from it.

 LDP光源装置は、DPP光源装置が改良されたものであり、例えば、放電を発生させる電極(放電電極)表面にEUV放射種を含む液体状の高温プラズマ原料(例えば、Sn(スズ)やLi(リチウム)等)を供給し、当該原料に対してエネルギービーム(例えば、電子ビームやレーザビーム等)を照射して当該原料を気化し、その後、放電によって高温プラズマを生成するものである。 The LDP light source device is an improved version of the DPP light source device, and for example, it supplies liquid high-temperature plasma raw material (such as Sn (tin) or Li (lithium)) containing EUV radiating species to the surface of an electrode (discharge electrode) that generates a discharge, irradiates the raw material with an energy beam (such as an electron beam or laser beam) to vaporize the raw material, and then generates high-temperature plasma by discharging the material.

 LPP光源装置は、EUV放射種をレーザビーム等により励起して高温プラズマを生成するものである。この方式の光源装置としては、EUV放射用ターゲット材料である微小な液滴状に噴出されたスズ(Sn)、または、リチウム(Li)等のドロップレットに対して、レーザ光を集光することにより当該ターゲット材料を励起してプラズマを発生させるものが知られている。また、LPP方式の光源装置として、回転体の表面にEUV放射種を含む液体状の高温プラズマ原料を供給し、回転体の表面にエネルギービーム(レーザビーム)を照射してプラズマを発生さる装置も知られている。  LPP light source devices excite EUV radiating species with a laser beam or the like to generate high-temperature plasma. A known light source device of this type generates plasma by focusing laser light on droplets of EUV radiating target material, such as tin (Sn) or lithium (Li), ejected in the form of tiny liquid droplets. Another known LPP light source device generates plasma by supplying liquid high-temperature plasma raw material containing EUV radiating species to the surface of a rotating body and irradiating the surface of the rotating body with an energy beam (laser beam).

 なお、これらの光源装置で生成されるプラズマからは、デブリが高速で放散される。このデブリには、高温プラズマ原料の粒子や、プラズマの発生に伴いスパッタリングされる放電電極の材料粒子等が含まれる。このようなデブリがEUV光等の放射光を利用する利用装置に到達すると、利用装置内に設けられた反射膜等の光学素子を損傷することや汚染することが考えられる。このため、光源装置には、プラズマから放散されるデブリが利用装置に侵入しないように、プラズマと利用装置との間でデブリを捕捉するデブリ低減装置(DMT(Debris Mitigation Tool)とも言う)が設けられる。 In addition, debris is dispersed at high speed from the plasma generated by these light source devices. This debris includes particles of high-temperature plasma raw materials and particles of the material of the discharge electrodes that are sputtered as the plasma is generated. If such debris reaches the utilization device that utilizes radiation such as EUV light, it is possible that it will damage or contaminate optical elements such as reflective films installed in the utilization device. For this reason, the light source devices are equipped with a debris reduction device (also called a DMT (Debris Mitigation Tool)) that captures debris between the plasma and the utilization device to prevent debris dispersed from the plasma from entering the utilization device.

 このように、プラズマを光源として放射光を発生させる光源装置では、プラズマを発生させる光源側の空間の圧力を維持することが重要となる。例えば特許文献1には、アパーチャ部材を用いて光源側の圧力を維持するDPP方式の光源装置が記載されている。この光源装置では、放電によりプラズマを発生する放電空間とEUV光集光部が設けられる集光空間との間にアパーチャ部材が設けられる。またアパーチャ部材の下流側には、プラズマからのデブリを低減するためのガスカーテンが形成される。このような構成により、集光空間と放電空間との間で圧力差を維持し、効率よくデブリを低減することが可能となっている(特許文献1の明細書段落[0027]、[0033]図1等)。 In this way, in a light source device that uses plasma as a light source to generate radiation, it is important to maintain the pressure in the space on the light source side where the plasma is generated. For example, Patent Document 1 describes a DPP type light source device that maintains the pressure on the light source side using an aperture member. In this light source device, an aperture member is provided between the discharge space where plasma is generated by discharge and the collection space where the EUV light collector is provided. In addition, a gas curtain is formed downstream of the aperture member to reduce debris from the plasma. This configuration makes it possible to maintain a pressure difference between the collection space and the discharge space and efficiently reduce debris (see Patent Document 1, paragraphs [0027] and [0033], Figure 1, etc.).

 ところで、放射光が導入される導入側の空間の圧力については、圧力の変更が求められる場合がある。例えば特許文献2には、極端紫外線等を照射する照射装置において、光線が照射される光学要素をクリーニングする方法が記載されている。この方法では、照射装置の稼働中に、水素やハロゲンを含む反応相手を光学要素の近傍に供給し、光線によりラジカルとなった反応相手を利用して光学要素に付着したデブリ等がクリーニングされる(特許文献1の明細書段落[0114]-[0116]図1等)。この方法では、反応相手を供給する場合や供給を停止した場合に、光学要素が設けられた空間の圧力が変化することが考えられる。この他にも、装置のメンテナンスや条件の変更等に応じて放射光の導入側の圧力が変えられる場合があり得る。 Incidentally, there are cases where the pressure in the space on the introduction side where the synchrotron radiation is introduced needs to be changed. For example, Patent Document 2 describes a method for cleaning optical elements irradiated with light in an irradiation device that irradiates extreme ultraviolet rays and the like. In this method, a reaction partner containing hydrogen or halogen is supplied near the optical element while the irradiation device is in operation, and the reaction partner that has become a radical due to the light is used to clean debris and the like that has adhered to the optical element (see, for example, paragraphs [0114]-[0116], Figure 1 in the specification of Patent Document 1). In this method, it is considered that the pressure in the space in which the optical element is located changes when the reaction partner is supplied or when the supply is stopped. In addition, there may be cases where the pressure on the introduction side of the synchrotron radiation needs to be changed in response to maintenance of the device, changes in conditions, etc.

特開2007-179881号公報JP 2007-179881 A 特表2006-529057号公報Special Publication No. 2006-529057

 このように、放射光が導入される導入側の圧力を変更すると、それに伴い、光源側の圧力が変化する可能性がある。この場合、光源側でのプラズマの発生条件等が崩れ、放射光の発光が不安定になるおそれがある。このため、放射光の導入側の圧力の変化による光源側の圧力の変化を抑制する技術が求められている。 In this way, when the pressure on the introduction side where the synchrotron radiation is introduced is changed, there is a possibility that the pressure on the light source side will change accordingly. In this case, the conditions for generating plasma on the light source side may be disrupted, and the emission of synchrotron radiation may become unstable. For this reason, there is a demand for technology that can suppress changes in pressure on the light source side caused by changes in pressure on the introduction side of the synchrotron radiation.

 以上のような事情に鑑み、本発明の目的は、放射光の導入側の圧力の変化による光源側の圧力の変化を抑制することが可能な光源装置及びクリーニング方法を提供することにある。 In view of the above, the object of the present invention is to provide a light source device and cleaning method that can suppress changes in pressure on the light source side caused by changes in pressure on the input side of the radiation light.

 上記目的を達成するため、本発明の一形態に係る光源装置は、第1の真空チャンバと、光源部と、デブリ低減装置とを具備する。
 前記光源部は、前記第1の真空チャンバ内で光源となるプラズマを発生させる。
 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記プラズマから放散されるデブリを低減するデブリ低減装置であって、前記第1の真空チャンバと前記プラズマから放射される放射光が導入される第2の真空チャンバとをつなぎ前記放射光を通過させる真空路を形成し、前記真空路を遮るように前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力及び前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力よりも圧力が高くなる高圧力領域を発生させる。
In order to achieve the above object, a light source device according to one aspect of the present invention includes a first vacuum chamber, a light source unit, and a debris reduction device.
The light source unit generates plasma that serves as a light source in the first vacuum chamber.
The debris mitigation device is a debris mitigation device that reduces debris dispersed from the plasma, and forms a vacuum path that connects the first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber into which radiation emitted from the plasma is introduced and allows the radiation to pass through, and generates a high-pressure region whose pressure is higher than the pressure of the first vacuum chamber and the pressure of the second vacuum chamber so as to block the vacuum path.

 この光源装置では、デブリ低減装置により、プラズマを発生させる第1の真空チャンバと、プラズマからの放射光が導入される第2の真空チャンバとをつなぐ真空路が形成される。さらに真空路を遮るように、第1の真空チャンバの圧力及び第2の真空チャンバの圧力よりも圧力が高い高圧力領域が形成される。これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバでの圧力の変化が高圧力領域により吸収される。このため、放射光の導入側の圧力の変化による光源側の圧力の変化を抑制することが可能となる。 In this light source device, the debris reduction device forms a vacuum path connecting a first vacuum chamber that generates plasma and a second vacuum chamber into which radiation from the plasma is introduced. Furthermore, a high-pressure region with a pressure higher than the pressure in the first vacuum chamber and the pressure in the second vacuum chamber is formed so as to block the vacuum path. This allows pressure changes in, for example, the second vacuum chamber to be absorbed by the high-pressure region. This makes it possible to suppress changes in pressure on the light source side due to changes in pressure on the radiation introduction side.

 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記高圧力領域と前記第2の真空チャンバとの間で前記真空路のコンダクタンスを下げるコンダクタンス低減部を有してもよい。
 これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力に影響を受けずに高圧力領域を維持することが可能となり、導入側の圧力の変化を十分に吸収することが可能となる。
The debris mitigation apparatus may include a conductance reducer that reduces the conductance of the vacuum path between the high pressure region and the second vacuum chamber.
This makes it possible to maintain a high pressure region without being affected by the pressure in the second vacuum chamber, for example, and makes it possible to sufficiently absorb changes in pressure on the introduction side.

 前記コンダクタンス低減部は、前記真空路に配置される複数のホイルと前記複数のホイルを固定する固定部材とを有する固定式ホイルトラップであってもよい。
 これにより、固定式ホイルトラップによりデブリを低減することが可能となる。
The conductance reducing portion may be a fixed foil trap having a plurality of foils disposed in the vacuum path and a fixing member that fixes the plurality of foils.
This allows for debris reduction with fixed foil traps.

 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記高圧力領域と前記第1の真空チャンバとの間に設けられ、前記真空路の経路方向と交差する断面が前記高圧力領域よりも大きい筒状部材を有してもよい。
 これにより、例えば高圧力領域の圧力を短い距離で低下させることが可能となり、第1の真空チャンバの圧力に維持することが可能となる。
The debris mitigation apparatus may include a tubular member disposed between the high pressure region and the first vacuum chamber, the tubular member having a cross section intersecting with a path direction of the vacuum path larger than that of the high pressure region.
This makes it possible, for example, to reduce the pressure in the high pressure region over a short distance and maintain it at the pressure of the first vacuum chamber.

 前記デブリ低減装置は、複数のホイルと、前記複数のホイルを放射状に支持する回転部材とを有する回転式ホイルトラップを有してもよい。この場合、前記筒状部材は、前記回転式ホイルトラップを囲む回転式ホイルトラップカバーであってもよい。
 これにより、回転式ホイルトラップによりデブリを低減することが可能となる。
The debris mitigation device may include a rotary foil trap having a plurality of foils and a rotary member that radially supports the plurality of foils, in which case the cylindrical member may be a rotary foil trap cover that surrounds the rotary foil trap.
This allows for debris reduction with a rotating foil trap.

 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力が少なくとも前記高圧力領域の圧力以下の範囲で変化する際に、前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力を実質的に変化させなくてもよい。
 これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力が変化しても、第1の真空チャンバの圧力を十分に維持することが可能となる。
The debris mitigation apparatus may allow the pressure in the first vacuum chamber to remain substantially unchanged when the pressure in the second vacuum chamber varies at least within a range equal to or less than the pressure of the high pressure region.
This makes it possible to sufficiently maintain the pressure in the first vacuum chamber even if the pressure in the second vacuum chamber changes, for example.

 前記高圧力領域の圧力は、前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力の6倍以上の圧力であってもよい。
 これにより、例えば導入側の圧力の変化を確実に吸収することが可能となる。
The pressure in the high pressure region may be six times or more the pressure in the first vacuum chamber.
This makes it possible to reliably absorb, for example, pressure changes on the introduction side.

 前記光源装置は、さらに、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を変化させるバッファガスを導入する導入口と、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を調整する圧力調整機構とを具備してもよい。
 これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力を容易に調整することが可能となり、様々な運転モードを実現することが可能となる。
The light source device may further include an inlet for introducing a buffer gas that changes the pressure in the second vacuum chamber, and a pressure adjustment mechanism for adjusting the pressure in the second vacuum chamber.
This makes it possible to easily adjust the pressure in, for example, the second vacuum chamber, and thus realize various operation modes.

 前記高圧力領域は、前記バッファガスが導入される領域であってもよい。この場合、前記導入口は、前記高圧力領域につながる第1の導入口を含んでもよい。
 これにより、例えば高圧力領域を実現しつつ第2の真空チャンバの圧力を変化させることが可能となる。
The high pressure region may be a region into which the buffer gas is introduced. In this case, the inlet may include a first inlet leading to the high pressure region.
This makes it possible, for example, to change the pressure in the second vacuum chamber while realizing a high pressure region.

 前記光源装置は、さらに、前記第2の真空チャンバを具備してもよい。この場合、前記導入口は、前記第2の真空チャンバに設けられる第2の導入口を含んでもよい。
 これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力を容易に変化させることが可能となる。
The light source device may further include the second vacuum chamber. In this case, the introduction port may include a second introduction port provided in the second vacuum chamber.
This makes it possible, for example, to easily change the pressure in the second vacuum chamber.

 前記バッファガスは、前記放射光により電離する電離ガスであってもよい。この場合、前記光源装置は、通常運転と、前記電離ガスによるクリーニング運転とが可能であってもよい。
 これにより、例えば放射光を安定して発生させたまま、第2の真空チャンバに設けられた光学素子等をクリーニングすることが可能となる。
The buffer gas may be an ionized gas that is ionized by the radiation. In this case, the light source device may be capable of a normal operation and a cleaning operation using the ionized gas.
This makes it possible to clean optical elements and the like provided in the second vacuum chamber while stably generating radiation, for example.

 前記クリーニング運転は、前記通常運転時の圧力である第1の圧力に維持された第2の真空チャンバに前記電離ガスを導入し、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を前記第1の圧力よりも高い第2の圧力まで上昇させ、前記第2の圧力を維持した状態で、前記第2の真空チャンバ内に配置されたターゲットに対し、前記放射光により電離した前記電離ガスによるスパッタを行う運転であってもよい。
 これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバに設けられた光学素子等を所望のレートでスパッタすることが可能となる。
The cleaning operation may be an operation of introducing the ionized gas into a second vacuum chamber maintained at a first pressure which is the pressure during normal operation, increasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to a second pressure higher than the first pressure, and performing sputtering on a target placed in the second vacuum chamber using the ionized gas ionized by the synchrotron radiation while maintaining the second pressure.
This makes it possible to sputter, for example, an optical element or the like disposed in the second vacuum chamber at a desired rate.

 前記第2の圧力は、6Pa以上であってもよい。
 これにより、例えば所望のレートでのスパッタを行うことが可能となる。
The second pressure may be 6 Pa or more.
This makes it possible to perform sputtering at a desired rate, for example.

 前記通常運転時の前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力は、前記放射光が安定する第3の圧力に設定されてもよい。この場合、前記第2の圧力は、前記第3の圧力の3倍以上の圧力であってもよい。
 これにより、例えば比較的高いレートでのスパッタを行うことが可能となる。
The pressure of the first vacuum chamber during normal operation may be set to a third pressure at which the radiation is stable. In this case, the second pressure may be three times or more the third pressure.
This allows, for example, sputtering to be carried out at a relatively high rate.

 前記電離ガスは、希ガスであってもよい。
 これにより、例えば各チャンバ内の部材が電離ガスにより腐食されるといった事態を回避できるとともに、各チャンバから排気されるガスを容易に処理することが可能となる。
The ionizable gas may be a noble gas.
This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the members inside each chamber from being corroded by the ionized gas, and also makes it possible to easily treat the gas exhausted from each chamber.

 前記光源装置は、さらに、前記第2の真空チャンバと、前記第2の真空チャンバに設けられ前記放射光の光量を検出する光量モニタとを具備してもよい。この場合、前記通常運転及び前記クリーニング運転は、前記光量モニタの検出結果に基づいて切り替えて実行されてもよい。
 これにより、例えば光学素子の汚染に合わせてクリーニングを行うことが可能となる。
The light source device may further include the second vacuum chamber and a light amount monitor provided in the second vacuum chamber and configured to detect an amount of the radiated light. In this case, the normal operation and the cleaning operation may be switched and executed based on a detection result of the light amount monitor.
This makes it possible to perform cleaning in response to contamination of, for example, optical elements.

 前記圧力調整機構は、前記導入口から導入される前記バッファガスの流量を調整する流量調整バルブ、又は、前記第2の真空チャンバの排気量を調整する排気量調整バルブの少なくとも一方であってもよい。
 これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力を精度よく調整することが可能となる。
The pressure adjustment mechanism may be at least one of a flow rate adjustment valve that adjusts the flow rate of the buffer gas introduced from the inlet, or an exhaust rate adjustment valve that adjusts the exhaust rate of the second vacuum chamber.
This makes it possible to precisely adjust the pressure in, for example, the second vacuum chamber.

 前記放射光は、EUV光であってもよい。
 これにより、例えばメンテナンスが容易で光量が安定したEUV光源装置を実現することが可能となる。
The radiation may be EUV light.
This makes it possible to realize, for example, an EUV light source device that is easy to maintain and has a stable light output.

 前記光源部は、前記第1の真空チャンバ内に放電領域を挟んで配置された一対の回転電極と、前記一対の回転電極にプラズマ原料を供給する原料供給部と、前記一対の回転電極のうち一方の回転電極の前記放電領域に面した部位に前記プラズマ原料を気化するエネルギービームを入射するエネルギービーム入射部と、前記一対の回転電極に前記エネルギービームにより気化した前記プラズマ原料をプラズマ化する電圧を印加する電圧源とを有してもよい。 The light source unit may include a pair of rotating electrodes arranged in the first vacuum chamber on either side of a discharge region, a raw material supply unit that supplies plasma raw material to the pair of rotating electrodes, an energy beam injection unit that injects an energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw material onto a portion of one of the pair of rotating electrodes facing the discharge region, and a voltage source that applies a voltage to the pair of rotating electrodes to convert the plasma raw material vaporized by the energy beam into plasma.

 前記光源部は、前記第1の真空チャンバ内に配置された回転体と、前記回転体にプラズマ原料を供給する原料供給部と、前記回転体に供給された前記プラズマ原料をプラズマ化するエネルギービームを入射するエネルギービーム入射部とを有してもよい。 The light source unit may have a rotating body disposed in the first vacuum chamber, a raw material supply unit that supplies plasma raw material to the rotating body, and an energy beam incident unit that incidents an energy beam that converts the plasma raw material supplied to the rotating body into plasma.

 本発明の一形態に係るクリーニング方法は、前記光源装置を用いて行われるクリーニング方法であって、以下の工程を備える。
 前記プラズマを発生させた状態で、通常運転時の圧力である第1の圧力に維持された第2の真空チャンバに前記放射光により電離する電離ガスを導入し、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を前記第1の圧力よりも高い第2の圧力まで上昇させる圧力上昇工程。
 前記第2の圧力を維持した状態で、前記第2の真空チャンバ内に配置されたターゲットに対し、前記放射光により電離した前記電離ガスによるスパッタを行うスパッタ工程。
A cleaning method according to one aspect of the present invention is a cleaning method performed using the light source device, and includes the following steps.
a pressure increasing step of introducing an ionized gas that is ionized by the synchrotron radiation into a second vacuum chamber maintained at a first pressure that is a pressure during normal operation while the plasma is being generated, and increasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to a second pressure that is higher than the first pressure.
a sputtering step of performing sputtering on a target disposed in the second vacuum chamber with the ionized gas ionized by the synchrotron radiation while maintaining the second pressure;

 これにより、放射光の導入側の圧力の変化による光源側の圧力の変化を抑制することが可能となり、電離ガスを導入してスパッタを行う場合でも安定して放射光を発生させることが可能となる。これにより、第2の真空チャンバに設けられた光学素子等を容易にクリーニングすることが可能となる。 This makes it possible to suppress changes in pressure on the light source side caused by changes in pressure on the side where the synchrotron radiation is introduced, and makes it possible to generate stable synchrotron radiation even when sputtering is performed by introducing ionized gas. This makes it possible to easily clean optical elements and the like installed in the second vacuum chamber.

 前記光源装置は、さらに、前記第2の真空チャンバと、前記第2の真空チャンバに設けられ前記放射光の光量を検出する光量モニタとを有してもよい。この場合、前記光量モニタが検出した光量が第1の閾値よりも低くなった場合に、前記圧力上昇工程と前記スパッタ工程とを実行してもよい。さらに、前記光量モニタが検出した光量が前記第1の閾値以上の第2の閾値よりも高くなった場合に、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を前記第1の圧力になるまで下降させる圧力下降工程を備えてもよい。
 これにより、例えば光学素子の汚染に合わせてクリーニングを行うことが可能となる。
The light source device may further include the second vacuum chamber and a light quantity monitor provided in the second vacuum chamber and detecting the quantity of the emitted light. In this case, the pressure increasing step and the sputtering step may be executed when the quantity of light detected by the light quantity monitor becomes lower than a first threshold. The light source device may further include a pressure decreasing step of decreasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to the first pressure when the quantity of light detected by the light quantity monitor becomes higher than a second threshold equal to or higher than the first threshold.
This makes it possible to perform cleaning in response to contamination of, for example, optical elements.

 前記スパッタ工程は、前記第2の圧力を維持した状態で、前記放射光の光量を前記通常運転時の前記放射光の光量から変化させる工程を含んでもよい。
 これにより、例えばスパッタレート等を細かく制御することが可能となる。
The sputtering step may include a step of changing an amount of the synchrotron radiation from an amount of the synchrotron radiation during the normal operation while maintaining the second pressure.
This allows fine control of, for example, the sputtering rate.

 以上のように、本発明によれば、放射光の導入側の圧力の変化による光源側の圧力の変化を抑制すること。なお、ここに記載された効果は必ずしも限定されるものではなく、本開示中に記載されたいずれかの効果であってもよい。 As described above, according to the present invention, changes in pressure on the light source side caused by changes in pressure on the introduction side of the radiation light are suppressed. Note that the effects described here are not necessarily limited to those described herein, and may be any of the effects described in this disclosure.

本発明の一実施形態に係る光源装置の構成例を示す模式図である。1 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a light source device according to an embodiment of the present invention; 光源装置に搭載されたデブリ低減装置の構成例を示す模式図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a debris reduction device mounted on a light source device. 回転式ホイルトラップの構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap. 回転式ホイルトラップの構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap. 回転式ホイルトラップカバーの構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap cover. 回転式ホイルトラップカバーの構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a rotary foil trap cover. 固定式ホイルトラップの構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap. 固定式ホイルトラップの構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap. 固定式ホイルトラップカバーの構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap cover. 固定式ホイルトラップカバーの構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of a fixed foil trap cover. デブリ低減装置の構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the configuration of a debris reduction device. 光源装置内の圧力のシミュレーション結果を示すグラフである。11 is a graph showing a simulation result of the pressure inside the light source device. 第1の真空チャンバ及び第2の真空チャンバの圧力の関係を示すグラフである。4 is a graph showing a relationship between the pressure in a first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber. スパッタの実験に用いたサンプルの配置例を示す模式図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of samples used in a sputtering experiment. スパッタレートと圧力との関係を示すグラフである。1 is a graph showing the relationship between sputtering rate and pressure. スパッタレートと圧力とサンプル位置との関係を示すグラフである。1 is a graph showing the relationship between sputter rate, pressure, and sample position. スパッタレートとプラズマの発光周波数との関係を示すグラフである。1 is a graph showing the relationship between the sputtering rate and the emission frequency of plasma. 光源装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。4 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the light source device. スパッタが生じるスパッタ領域について説明する模式図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating a sputtering region where sputtering occurs. 遮光板を利用した光学系の構成例を示す模式図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of an optical system using a light shielding plate. 遮光板を利用した光学系の他の構成例を示す模式図である。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of an optical system using a light-shielding plate. LPP方式の光源部の構成例を示す模式図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of an LPP type light source unit. LPP方式の光源部の他の構成例を示す模式図であるFIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of the light source unit of the LPP method;

 以下、本発明に係る実施形態を、図面を参照しながら説明する。 Below, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

 [光源装置の概要]
 図1は、本発明の一実施形態に係る光源装置の構成例を示す模式図である。図1は、光源装置100を設置面から所定の高さの位置で水平方向に沿って切断した場合の模式的な断面を、Z方向の正方向側から見た場合の図である。以下、X方向を左右方向(X軸の正側が右側、負側が左側)、Y方向を奥行方向(Y軸の正側が手前側、負側が奥側)、Z方向を上下方向(Z軸の正側が上側、負側が下側)として説明を行う。もちろん、本技術の適用について、光源装置100が使用される向き等が限定される訳ではない。
[Light source device overview]
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a light source device according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-section of the light source device 100 cut horizontally at a position of a predetermined height from the installation surface, as viewed from the positive side of the Z direction. In the following description, the X direction is the left-right direction (the positive side of the X axis is the right side, and the negative side is the left side), the Y direction is the depth direction (the positive side of the Y axis is the front side, and the negative side is the back side), and the Z direction is the up-down direction (the positive side of the Z axis is the upper side, and the negative side is the lower side). Of course, the application of this technology is not limited to the orientation in which the light source device 100 is used.

 光源装置100は、LDP方式のEUV光源装置であり、極端紫外光(EUV光1)を放射する。EUV光1の波長は、例えば13.5nmである。 The light source device 100 is an LDP type EUV light source device, and emits extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light 1). The wavelength of the EUV light 1 is, for example, 13.5 nm.

 光源装置100は、例えば半導体デバイス製造におけるリソグラフィ装置の光源装置、又はリソグラフィに使用されるマスクの検査装置の光源装置として使用可能である。例えば、光源装置100がマスク検査装置用の光源装置として使用される場合、プラズマPから放射されるEUV光1の一部が取り出され、マスク検査装置に導光される。そして、マスク検査装置により、光源装置100から放射されるEUV光1を検査光として、マスクのブランクス検査又はパターン検査が行われる。 The light source device 100 can be used, for example, as a light source device for a lithography device in semiconductor device manufacturing, or as a light source device for an inspection device for a mask used in lithography. For example, when the light source device 100 is used as a light source device for a mask inspection device, a portion of the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P is extracted and guided to the mask inspection device. Then, the mask inspection device performs mask blank inspection or pattern inspection using the EUV light 1 emitted from the light source device 100 as inspection light.

 本実施形態では、EUV光1は、プラズマから放射される放射光の一例である。なお、放射光の種類は限定されない。本発明は、例えばEUV光1以外の軟X線領域の光や、よりエネルギーの高い硬X線等が放射される場合にも適用可能である。 In this embodiment, EUV light 1 is an example of radiation emitted from plasma. The type of radiation is not limited. The present invention is also applicable to cases where light in the soft X-ray region other than EUV light 1, or hard X-rays with higher energy, etc. are emitted.

 光源装置100は、第1の真空チャンバ10、第2の真空チャンバ20、光源部30、及びデブリ低減装置40を有する。第1の真空チャンバ10は、光源部30がプラズマPを発生させる真空チャンバである。第2の真空チャンバ20は、プラズマPから放射されるEUV光1が導入される真空チャンバである。デブリ低減装置40は、第1の真空チャンバ10と第2の真空チャンバ20との間でプラズマPから放散されるデブリを低減する装置である。 The light source device 100 has a first vacuum chamber 10, a second vacuum chamber 20, a light source unit 30, and a debris reduction device 40. The first vacuum chamber 10 is a vacuum chamber in which the light source unit 30 generates plasma P. The second vacuum chamber 20 is a vacuum chamber into which the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P is introduced. The debris reduction device 40 is a device that reduces debris dissipated from the plasma P between the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20.

 [第1の真空チャンバ]
 第1の真空チャンバ10は、光源部30が有する種々の機構を収容する筐体である。第1の真空チャンバ10は、例えば直方体又は円筒型の形状を有し、金属等の剛体により構成される。もちろん第1の真空チャンバ10の具体的な形状や材料等は限定されない。
[First vacuum chamber]
The first vacuum chamber 10 is a housing that houses various mechanisms of the light source unit 30. The first vacuum chamber 10 has, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped or cylindrical shape, and is made of a rigid body such as metal. Of course, the specific shape, material, etc. of the first vacuum chamber 10 are not limited.

 第1の真空チャンバ10の内部は、図示しない真空ポンプにより所定圧力以下の減圧雰囲気に維持される。第1の真空チャンバ10の左側の側壁10aには、フィードスルーFA及びFBが配置される。フィードスルーFA及びFBは、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部の減圧雰囲気を維持しつつ、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部に電線等を挿入することを可能とするシール部材である。 The inside of the first vacuum chamber 10 is maintained at a reduced pressure atmosphere below a predetermined pressure by a vacuum pump (not shown). Feedthroughs FA and FB are arranged on the left side wall 10a of the first vacuum chamber 10. The feedthroughs FA and FB are sealing members that allow electrical wires, etc. to be inserted into the first vacuum chamber 10 while maintaining the reduced pressure atmosphere inside the first vacuum chamber 10.

 第1の真空チャンバ10の手前側の側壁10bには、透明窓11が配置される。透明窓11は、後述するレーザビームLBに対して透明な材料により構成される。透明窓11の材料や形状等の具体的な構成は限定されない。また第1の真空チャンバ10の右側の側壁10cには、第2の真空チャンバ20と接続するための貫通孔12が設けられる。また本実施形態では、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部に、貫通孔12を覆うようにデブリ低減装置40が配置される。 A transparent window 11 is disposed on the side wall 10b on the front side of the first vacuum chamber 10. The transparent window 11 is made of a material that is transparent to the laser beam LB described below. The specific configuration of the transparent window 11, such as its material and shape, is not limited. A through hole 12 for connecting to the second vacuum chamber 20 is provided on the right side wall 10c of the first vacuum chamber 10. In this embodiment, a debris reduction device 40 is disposed inside the first vacuum chamber 10 so as to cover the through hole 12.

 [第2の真空チャンバ]
 第2の真空チャンバ20は、例えばEUV光1が入射する光学素子21等を収容する筐体である。光学素子21は、例えばEUV光1を集光するための集光ミラーや、EUV光1の光路を曲げるための反射ミラー等である。また例えば、EUV光1を利用する利用装置(マスク検査装置やリソグラフィ装置等)と、光源装置とを接続する容器として、第2の真空チャンバ20が構成されてもよい。第2の真空チャンバ20は、例えば直方体又は円筒型の形状を有し、金属等の剛体により構成される。もちろん第2の真空チャンバ20の具体的な形状や材料等は限定されない。
[Second Vacuum Chamber]
The second vacuum chamber 20 is a housing that houses an optical element 21 into which the EUV light 1 is incident, for example. The optical element 21 is, for example, a collector mirror for collecting the EUV light 1, a reflecting mirror for bending the optical path of the EUV light 1, or the like. In addition, for example, the second vacuum chamber 20 may be configured as a container that connects a utilization device (such as a mask inspection device or a lithography device) that utilizes the EUV light 1 to a light source device. The second vacuum chamber 20 has, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped or cylindrical shape, and is configured of a rigid body such as metal. Of course, the specific shape, material, etc. of the second vacuum chamber 20 are not limited.

 第2の真空チャンバ20の内部は、図示しない真空ポンプにより所定圧力以下の減圧雰囲気に維持される。第2の真空チャンバ20の左側の側壁20aには、第1の真空チャンバ10の貫通孔12と連通する貫通孔22が配置される。また例えば、第2の真空チャンバ20には、光学素子21を通ったEUV光1を出射する出射口(図示省略)等が適宜設けられる。 The interior of the second vacuum chamber 20 is maintained at a reduced pressure atmosphere below a predetermined pressure by a vacuum pump (not shown). A through hole 22 that communicates with the through hole 12 of the first vacuum chamber 10 is arranged in the left side wall 20a of the second vacuum chamber 20. In addition, for example, an exit port (not shown) for emitting the EUV light 1 that has passed through the optical element 21, etc. are appropriately provided in the second vacuum chamber 20.

 なお、光源装置100は、必ずしも第2の真空チャンバ20を備える必要は無い。例えば利用装置側に第2の真空チャンバ20が設けられてもよい。この場合、EUV光1を導入するために利用装置に設けられた真空チャンバ等が、第2の真空チャンバとして用いられる。 The light source device 100 does not necessarily need to include the second vacuum chamber 20. For example, the second vacuum chamber 20 may be provided on the utilization device side. In this case, a vacuum chamber or the like provided on the utilization device for introducing the EUV light 1 is used as the second vacuum chamber.

 [光源部]
 光源部30は、第1の真空チャンバ10内で光源となるプラズマPを発生させる。光源部30は、放電モジュール31、制御部32、パルス電力供給部33、レーザ源34、集光レンズ35、及び可動ミラー36を有する。このうち、制御部32、パルス電力供給部33、レーザ源34、集光レンズ35、及び可動ミラー36は、第1の真空チャンバ10の外に設けられる。
[Light source]
The light source unit 30 generates plasma P, which serves as a light source, in the first vacuum chamber 10. The light source unit 30 has a discharge module 31, a control unit 32, a pulsed power supply unit 33, a laser source 34, a condenser lens 35, and a movable mirror 36. Of these, the control unit 32, the pulsed power supply unit 33, the laser source 34, the condenser lens 35, and the movable mirror 36 are provided outside the first vacuum chamber 10.

 放電モジュール31は、第1の真空チャンバ10内でプラズマPを発生させるための放電を行うモジュールである。放電モジュール31は、コンテナCA及びCB、放電電極EA及びEB、並びにモータMA及びMBを有する。このうち、コンテナCA及びCB、放電電極EA及びEBは、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部に配置される。 The discharge module 31 is a module that performs discharge to generate plasma P within the first vacuum chamber 10. The discharge module 31 has containers CA and CB, discharge electrodes EA and EB, and motors MA and MB. Of these, the containers CA and CB and the discharge electrodes EA and EB are disposed inside the first vacuum chamber 10.

 コンテナCA及びCBは、プラズマ原料を貯留するための容器である。本実施形態では、コンテナCA及びCBは導電性を有する材料により構成される。コンテナCAにはプラズマ原料SAが貯留される。また、コンテナCBにはプラズマ原料SBが貯留される。プラズマ原料SA及びSBは、加熱された液相の原料である。本実施形態では、プラズマ原料SA及びSBとしてスズ(Sn)が用いられる。あるいはリチウム(Li)等の、プラズマを発生させることが可能な他の原料が用いられてもよい。 Containers CA and CB are vessels for storing plasma raw materials. In this embodiment, containers CA and CB are made of a conductive material. Plasma raw material SA is stored in container CA. Plasma raw material SB is stored in container CB. Plasma raw materials SA and SB are heated liquid phase raw materials. In this embodiment, tin (Sn) is used as plasma raw materials SA and SB. Alternatively, other raw materials capable of generating plasma, such as lithium (Li), may be used.

 放電電極EA及びEBは、円板形状を有する。放電電極EA及びEBは、例えばモリブデン(Mo)、タングステン(W)またはタンタル(Ta)等の高融点金属により構成される。放電電極EA及びEBの具体的な材料は限定されない。 The discharge electrodes EA and EB have a disk shape. The discharge electrodes EA and EB are made of a high melting point metal such as molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W) or tantalum (Ta). The specific material of the discharge electrodes EA and EB is not limited.

 例えば放電電極EAがカソード(陰極)として使用され、放電電極EBがアノード(陽極)として使用される。放電電極EA及びEBは互いに離隔して配置される。また、放電電極EA及びEBは、放電電極EA及びEBの各々の周縁部の一部が近接するように配置される。放電電極EA及びEBの周縁部が互いに最も接近した位置の間隙が、放電電極EA及びEBによる放電領域Dとなる。 For example, the discharge electrode EA is used as a cathode, and the discharge electrode EB is used as an anode. The discharge electrodes EA and EB are arranged at a distance from each other. The discharge electrodes EA and EB are also arranged so that a portion of the periphery of each of the discharge electrodes EA and EB is close to each other. The gap at the position where the peripheries of the discharge electrodes EA and EB are closest to each other becomes the discharge region D formed by the discharge electrodes EA and EB.

 また、放電電極EAは、放電電極EAの下部がコンテナCAに貯留されたプラズマ原料SAに浸されるように配置される。同様に放電電極EBも、下部がプラズマ原料SBに浸されるように配置される。 Furthermore, the discharge electrode EA is positioned so that the lower part of the discharge electrode EA is immersed in the plasma raw material SA stored in the container CA. Similarly, the discharge electrode EB is positioned so that the lower part of the discharge electrode EA is immersed in the plasma raw material SB.

 モータMAは、放電電極EAを回転させる。モータMAは回転軸JAを有する。モータMAの基体部は第1の真空チャンバ10の左側の外部に配置され、基体部に接続された回転軸JAが、第1の真空チャンバ10の外部から内部に延びる。回転軸JAの第1の真空チャンバ10の内部側の端部は、放電電極EAの中心(円形面の中心)に接続される。 The motor MA rotates the discharge electrode EA. The motor MA has a rotation axis JA. The base part of the motor MA is placed outside the first vacuum chamber 10 on the left side, and the rotation axis JA connected to the base part extends from the outside to the inside of the first vacuum chamber 10. The end of the rotation axis JA on the inside side of the first vacuum chamber 10 is connected to the center of the discharge electrode EA (the center of the circular surface).

 回転軸JAと第1の真空チャンバ10の壁の間の隙間は、シール部材PAで封止される。シール部材PAとして、例えばメカニカルシールが用いられる。シール部材PAにより、第1の真空チャンバ10内の減圧雰囲気が維持されつつ、回転軸JAが回転自在に支持される。 The gap between the rotating shaft JA and the wall of the first vacuum chamber 10 is sealed with a sealing member PA. For example, a mechanical seal is used as the sealing member PA. The sealing member PA supports the rotating shaft JA so that it can rotate freely while maintaining the reduced pressure atmosphere inside the first vacuum chamber 10.

 同様に、モータMBは回転軸JBを有し、回転軸JBは放電電極EBの中心に接続される。また、回転軸JBと第1の真空チャンバ10の壁の間の隙間は、シール部材PBで封止される。 Similarly, the motor MB has a rotating shaft JB, which is connected to the center of the discharge electrode EB. The gap between the rotating shaft JB and the wall of the first vacuum chamber 10 is sealed with a sealing member PB.

 なお、放電電極EA及びEBは、各々の軸線(回転軸の延在方向)が平行でないように配置される。具体的は、図1に示すように、放電電極EAは手前側(図1の下側)を右側に、奥側(図1の上側)を左側に傾けた状態で配置される。一方で、放電電極EBは手前側を左側に、奥側を右側に傾けた状態で配置される。回転軸JA及びJBの奥行方向(図1の上下方向、Z方向)における間隔も、モータMA及びMB側が狭く、放電電極EA及びEB側が広くなっている。さらに、放電電極EB、モータMB及び回転軸JBは、放電電極EA、モータMA及び回転軸JAに対して若干左側に配置される。 The discharge electrodes EA and EB are arranged so that their axes (extension directions of the rotation shafts) are not parallel. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the discharge electrode EA is arranged with its front side (lower side in FIG. 1) tilted to the right and its rear side (upper side in FIG. 1) tilted to the left. On the other hand, the discharge electrode EB is arranged with its front side tilted to the left and its rear side tilted to the right. The distance between the rotation shafts JA and JB in the depth direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1, Z direction) is also narrower on the side of the motors MA and MB and wider on the side of the discharge electrodes EA and EB. Furthermore, the discharge electrode EB, motor MB and rotation shaft JB are arranged slightly to the left of the discharge electrode EA, motor MA and rotation shaft JA.

 制御部32は、光源部30の各部の動作を制御する。例えば制御部32により、モータMA及びMBの回転駆動が制御され、放電電極EA及びEBが所定の回転数で回転する。
また、制御部32により、パルス電力供給部33の動作、及びレーザ源34によるレーザビームの照射タイミング等が制御される。
The control unit 32 controls the operation of each unit of the light source unit 30. For example, the control unit 32 controls the rotational driving of the motors MA and MB, and the discharge electrodes EA and EB rotate at a predetermined number of rotations.
Furthermore, the control unit 32 controls the operation of the pulsed power supply unit 33 and the timing of laser beam irradiation by the laser source 34 .

 例えばCPU、GPU、DSP等のプロセッサ、ROMやRAM等のメモリ、HDD等の記憶デバイス等、コンピュータの構成に必要なハードウェアを有するコントローラにより、制御部32が実現される。具体的には、コントローラのCPUが本技術に係るプログラム(例えばアプリケーションプログラム)を実行することで、機能ブロックとして制御部32が実現される。 The control unit 32 is realized by a controller having hardware necessary for configuring a computer, such as a processor such as a CPU, GPU, or DSP, memory such as a ROM or RAM, and a storage device such as a HDD. Specifically, the control unit 32 is realized as a functional block by the CPU of the controller executing a program related to the present technology (e.g., an application program).

 パルス電力供給部33は、放電電極EA及びEBへパルス電力を供給することにより、放電領域Dで放電を発生させる。パルス電力供給部33には給電線QA及びQBが接続される。給電線QAはフィードスルーFAを介して第1の真空チャンバ10の内部に挿入され、コンテナCAに接続される。給電線QBはフィードスルーFBを介して第1の真空チャンバ10の内部に挿入され、コンテナCBに接続される。 The pulsed power supply unit 33 generates a discharge in the discharge region D by supplying pulsed power to the discharge electrodes EA and EB. Power feed lines QA and QB are connected to the pulsed power supply unit 33. The power feed line QA is inserted into the first vacuum chamber 10 via a feedthrough FA and is connected to a container CA. The power feed line QB is inserted into the first vacuum chamber 10 via a feedthrough FB and is connected to a container CB.

 レーザ源34は、プラズマ原料SA及びSBを気化させるエネルギービームを出射する。レーザ源34は、第1の真空チャンバ10の外部に配置される。レーザ源34としては、例えばNd:YVO(Neodymium-doped Yttrium Orthovanadate)レーザ装置が用いられる。この場合、レーザ源34により、波長1064nmの赤外領域のレーザビームLBが出射される。もちろん、プラズマ原料SA及びSBを気化させることが可能であれば、レーザ源34の装置の種類や、照射されるレーザビームLBの波長等、レーザ源34の具体的な構成は限定されない。 The laser source 34 emits an energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw materials SA and SB. The laser source 34 is disposed outside the first vacuum chamber 10. For example, a Nd:YVO 4 (Neodymium-doped Yttrium Orthovanadate) laser device is used as the laser source 34. In this case, the laser source 34 emits a laser beam LB in the infrared region with a wavelength of 1064 nm. Of course, as long as it is possible to vaporize the plasma raw materials SA and SB, the specific configuration of the laser source 34, such as the type of device of the laser source 34 and the wavelength of the irradiated laser beam LB, is not limited.

 集光レンズ35は、第1の真空チャンバ10の外部の、レーザビームLBの光路上に配置される。レーザ源34により出射されたレーザビームLBが集光レンズ35に入射することで、レーザビームLBのスポット径が調整される。 The focusing lens 35 is disposed on the optical path of the laser beam LB outside the first vacuum chamber 10. The spot diameter of the laser beam LB is adjusted by the laser beam LB emitted by the laser source 34 being incident on the focusing lens 35.

 可動ミラー36は、第1の真空チャンバ10の外部の、レーザビームLBの光路上に配置される。ここでは、可動ミラー36は、レーザビームLBの光路上の、集光レンズ35の後ろ側に配置される。従って、集光レンズ35を通過したレーザビームLBが、可動ミラーに入射する。 The movable mirror 36 is disposed on the optical path of the laser beam LB outside the first vacuum chamber 10. Here, the movable mirror 36 is disposed on the optical path of the laser beam LB behind the focusing lens 35. Therefore, the laser beam LB that passes through the focusing lens 35 is incident on the movable mirror.

 可動ミラー36に入射したレーザビームLBは、可動ミラー36により反射され、第1の真空チャンバ10の透明窓11を通過する。そして、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部の、放電領域Dの近傍の放電電極EAの周縁部にレーザビームLBが到達する。なお、可動ミラー36の姿勢を変えることにより、放電電極EAに対するレーザビームLBの照射位置を調整することが可能である。 The laser beam LB incident on the movable mirror 36 is reflected by the movable mirror 36 and passes through the transparent window 11 of the first vacuum chamber 10. The laser beam LB then reaches the periphery of the discharge electrode EA near the discharge region D inside the first vacuum chamber 10. Note that by changing the position of the movable mirror 36, it is possible to adjust the irradiation position of the laser beam LB with respect to the discharge electrode EA.

 このように、光源部30では、第1の真空チャンバ10内に放電領域Dを挟んで放電電極EA及びEBが配置される。また放電電極EA及びEBには、コンテナCA及びCBから、プラズマ原料SA及びSBがそれぞれ供給される。本実施形態では、放電電極EA及びEBは、一対の回転電極に相当し、コンテナCA及びCBは、原料供給部に相当する。 In this way, in the light source unit 30, the discharge electrodes EA and EB are arranged in the first vacuum chamber 10 on either side of the discharge region D. Furthermore, plasma raw materials SA and SB are supplied to the discharge electrodes EA and EB from containers CA and CB, respectively. In this embodiment, the discharge electrodes EA and EB correspond to a pair of rotating electrodes, and the containers CA and CB correspond to the raw material supply unit.

 またレーザ源34、集光レンズ35、及び可動ミラー36により、放電電極EA及びEBのうち一方の放電電極EAの放電領域Dに面した部位にレーザビームLBが入射される。これにより、放電電極EAの回転に伴い放電領域Dの近傍に輸送された液相のプラズマ原料SAは、気相のプラズマ原料SAとなる。同様に、放電電極EBにより輸送されたプラズマ原料SBも、放電領域Dにおいて気相のプラズマ原料SBとなる。本実施形態では、レーザ源34、集光レンズ35、及び可動ミラー36を用いて、エネルギービーム入射部が実現される。また、レーザビームLBは、プラズマ原料を気化するエネルギービームに相当する。 In addition, the laser source 34, the condenser lens 35, and the movable mirror 36 cause the laser beam LB to be incident on the portion of one of the discharge electrodes EA and EB, the discharge electrode EA, that faces the discharge region D. As a result, the liquid-phase plasma raw material SA transported to the vicinity of the discharge region D as the discharge electrode EA rotates becomes gas-phase plasma raw material SA. Similarly, the plasma raw material SB transported by the discharge electrode EB also becomes gas-phase plasma raw material SB in the discharge region D. In this embodiment, the energy beam incident portion is realized using the laser source 34, the condenser lens 35, and the movable mirror 36. In addition, the laser beam LB corresponds to the energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw material.

 またパルス電力供給部33により、放電電極EA及びEBにレーザビームLBにより気化したプラズマ原料をプラズマ化する電圧(パルス電力)が印加される。これにより、放電電極EA及びEBの間の放電領域Dで放電が生じる。この放電により、放電領域Dに存在する気相のプラズマ原料SA及びSBが電流により加熱励起され、プラズマPが発生する。本実施形態では、パルス電力供給部33は、電圧源に相当する。 The pulsed power supply unit 33 also applies a voltage (pulsed power) to the discharge electrodes EA and EB to convert the plasma raw material vaporized by the laser beam LB into plasma. This generates a discharge in the discharge region D between the discharge electrodes EA and EB. This discharge heats and excites the gaseous plasma raw materials SA and SB present in the discharge region D with the current, generating plasma P. In this embodiment, the pulsed power supply unit 33 corresponds to a voltage source.

 放電領域Dにおいて発生したプラズマPからはEUV光1が放射される。放射されたEUV光1の一部(右向きの光)は、後述するデブリ低減装置40を通過して第2の真空チャンバ20の内部に導入される。図1には、EUV光1の光路の一例が、破線の矢印で図示されている。プラズマPは、本技術に係る光源の一実施形態に相当する。 EUV light 1 is emitted from the plasma P generated in the discharge region D. A portion of the emitted EUV light 1 (light directed to the right) passes through a debris mitigation device 40, which will be described later, and is introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20. In FIG. 1, an example of the optical path of the EUV light 1 is shown by a dashed arrow. The plasma P corresponds to one embodiment of the light source related to this technology.

 なお本実施形態では、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部は、所定圧力以下の減圧雰囲気に維持されている。これにより、プラズマ原料SA及びSBを加熱励起するための放電を良好に発生させることが可能となる。また、EUV光1の減衰を抑制することが可能となる。 In this embodiment, the inside of the first vacuum chamber 10 is maintained at a reduced pressure atmosphere below a predetermined pressure. This makes it possible to effectively generate a discharge for heating and exciting the plasma raw materials SA and SB. It also makes it possible to suppress attenuation of the EUV light 1.

 また、プラズマPからは、EUV光1とともにデブリが高速で様々な方向に放散される。デブリには、プラズマ原料SA、SBであるスズ粒子が含まれる。また、デブリには、プラズマPの発生に伴いスパッタリングされる放電電極EA及びEBの材料粒子が含まれる。具体的には、デブリには、高速で移動するイオン、中性原子及び電子が含まれる。これらのデブリは、プラズマPの収縮および膨張過程を経て、大きな運動エネルギーを得る。デブリの一部は、デブリ低減装置40に向けて放散される。 In addition, debris is dispersed from the plasma P at high speed in various directions together with the EUV light 1. The debris includes tin particles, which are the plasma raw materials SA and SB. The debris also includes material particles of the discharge electrodes EA and EB that are sputtered as the plasma P is generated. More specifically, the debris includes ions, neutral atoms, and electrons that move at high speed. This debris gains large kinetic energy through the contraction and expansion processes of the plasma P. Part of the debris is dispersed towards the debris mitigation device 40.

 [デブリ低減装置]
 図2は、光源装置100に搭載されたデブリ低減装置40の構成例を示す模式図である。図2には、光源装置100をXZ平面で切断した場合の断面を、手前側から見た状態が図示されている。なお図2では、放電モジュール31以外の光源部30の構成については図示を省略している。また、放電モジュール31についても、構成を省略して図示している。
[Debris Reduction Device]
Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of the debris mitigation device 40 mounted on the light source device 100. Fig. 2 shows a cross section of the light source device 100 cut in the XZ plane as viewed from the front side. Note that Fig. 2 omits the configuration of the light source unit 30 other than the discharge module 31. The configuration of the discharge module 31 is also omitted in the illustration.

 デブリ低減装置40は、プラズマPから放散されるデブリを低減する装置である。デブリ低減装置40は、第1の真空チャンバ10内で発生したプラズマPから第2の真空チャンバ20に向かうEUV光1の光路と重なるように配置される。また、デブリ低減装置40は、EUV光の光路上でデブリを捕捉するための機構を備える。すなわち、デブリ低減装置40は、プラズマPからのEUV光1を通過させる一方で、プラズマPからのデブリを捕捉するように構成される。デブリ低減装置40は、DMT(Debris Mitigation Tool)と呼ばれることもある。 The debris mitigation device 40 is a device that reduces debris dispersed from the plasma P. The debris mitigation device 40 is positioned so as to overlap with the optical path of the EUV light 1 traveling from the plasma P generated in the first vacuum chamber 10 toward the second vacuum chamber 20. The debris mitigation device 40 also includes a mechanism for capturing debris on the optical path of the EUV light. In other words, the debris mitigation device 40 is configured to allow the EUV light 1 from the plasma P to pass through while capturing debris from the plasma P. The debris mitigation device 40 is sometimes called a DMT (Debris Mitigation Tool).

 本実施形態では、デブリを捕捉するための機構として、ホイルトラップ(後述する回転式ホイルトラップ43及び固定式ホイルトラップ45)が用いられる。ホイルトラップは、複数のホイルを用いてプラズマPからのデブリを捕捉するデブリトラップである。ホイルトラップでは、複数のホイルが離間して配置される。このため、ホイルの間を通してEUV光1を通過させることが可能である。ホイルトラップを用いることで、例えばmmサイズの大きなデブリから、原子サイズの小さなデブリまでを捕捉することが可能となる。 In this embodiment, a foil trap (a rotating foil trap 43 and a fixed foil trap 45, described below) is used as a mechanism for capturing debris. A foil trap is a debris trap that uses multiple foils to capture debris from the plasma P. In a foil trap, multiple foils are arranged at a distance from each other. This allows the EUV light 1 to pass through between the foils. By using a foil trap, it is possible to capture debris ranging from large mm-sized debris to small atomic-sized debris.

 さらに、デブリ低減装置40は、第1の真空チャンバ10と第2の真空チャンバ20とをつなぎEUV光1を通過させる真空路13を形成する。ここで、真空路13とは、例えば2つの独立した真空チャンバをリークさせることなく接続して排気経路を構成する構造のことである。例えば真空路13でつながる2つの真空チャンバのうち、一方の真空チャンバだけを排気した場合、他方の真空チャンバは必ず真空路13(排気経路)を介して排気されることになる。 Furthermore, the debris reduction device 40 forms a vacuum path 13 that connects the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 and allows the EUV light 1 to pass through. Here, the vacuum path 13 refers to a structure that connects, for example, two independent vacuum chambers without leaks to form an exhaust path. For example, when only one of two vacuum chambers connected by the vacuum path 13 is evacuated, the other vacuum chamber will always be evacuated via the vacuum path 13 (exhaust path).

 デブリ低減装置40の内部には、このような真空路13が形成される。第1の真空チャンバ10の内部空間及び第2の真空チャンバ20の内部空間は、この真空路13によってリークすることなく連通する。また真空路13は、EUV光1を通過させる通路としても機能する。このため、真空路13には、少なくともEUV光1を遮ることなく通過させる直線状の経路が含まれる。ここでは、EUV光1が通過する直線状の経路の方向を真空路13の経路方向と記載する。図2には、真空路13の経路方向が点線の矢印を用いて模式的に図示されている。 Such a vacuum path 13 is formed inside the debris mitigation device 40. The internal space of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the internal space of the second vacuum chamber 20 are connected by this vacuum path 13 without leaks. The vacuum path 13 also functions as a passage for passing the EUV light 1. For this reason, the vacuum path 13 includes at least a straight path that allows the EUV light 1 to pass without being blocked. Here, the direction of the straight path through which the EUV light 1 passes is described as the path direction of the vacuum path 13. In Figure 2, the path direction of the vacuum path 13 is diagrammatically illustrated using a dotted arrow.

 さらにデブリ低減装置40は、真空路13を遮るように第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力及び第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力よりも圧力が高くなる高圧力領域14を発生させる。
ここで真空路13を遮る領域とは、例えば真空路13の経路方向と交差するような真空路13の断面を完全に覆うような領域を意味する。従って、真空路13を通過するには、必ず高圧力領域14を通過する必要がある。デブリ低減装置40は、このような高圧力領域14を真空路13の途中に発生させることが可能なように構成される。図2には、高圧力領域14となる部分が、ドットを用いたハッチングの領域により模式的に図示されている。
Furthermore, the debris mitigation device 40 generates a high pressure region 14 , the pressure of which is higher than the pressure in the first vacuum chamber 10 and the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 , so as to block the vacuum path 13 .
Here, the region that blocks the vacuum path 13 means, for example, a region that completely covers the cross section of the vacuum path 13 and intersects with the path direction of the vacuum path 13. Therefore, in order to pass through the vacuum path 13, it is necessary to pass through the high pressure region 14. The debris mitigation device 40 is configured so as to be able to generate such a high pressure region 14 midway through the vacuum path 13. In Figure 2, the part that becomes the high pressure region 14 is diagrammatically illustrated by a hatched region using dots.

 高圧力領域14は、上記したように第1の真空チャンバ10及び第2の真空チャンバ20のどちらの圧力よりも、内部の圧力を高く維持することが可能な領域である。すなわち、高圧力領域14では、バッファガス2(雰囲気ガス)の圧力(密度)を各真空チャンバの圧力よりも高くすることができる。デブリ低減装置40は、基本的に高圧力領域14が発生した状態で用いられる。 As described above, the high pressure region 14 is a region in which it is possible to maintain an internal pressure higher than the pressure in either the first vacuum chamber 10 or the second vacuum chamber 20. In other words, in the high pressure region 14, the pressure (density) of the buffer gas 2 (ambient gas) can be made higher than the pressure in each vacuum chamber. The debris reduction device 40 is basically used in a state in which the high pressure region 14 has been generated.

 例えば、一方の真空チャンバの圧力が変化したとする。この場合、高圧力領域14があることで、その圧力の変化が吸収される。このため、一方の真空チャンバの圧力の変化が他方の真空チャンバに伝わりにくくなる。すなわち、高圧力領域14は、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力と、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力とを分離する領域であるともいえる。 For example, suppose the pressure in one of the vacuum chambers changes. In this case, the presence of the high pressure region 14 absorbs the change in pressure. This makes it difficult for the change in pressure in one vacuum chamber to be transmitted to the other vacuum chamber. In other words, the high pressure region 14 can be said to be a region that separates the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10 from the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.

 高圧力領域14を形成するための構成として、デブリ低減装置40には、筒状部材41と、コンダクタンス低減部42とが設けられる。 The debris reduction device 40 is provided with a cylindrical member 41 and a conductance reduction section 42 as a configuration for forming the high pressure region 14.

 筒状部材41は、真空路13となる空間を囲む筒状の部材であり、高圧力領域14と第1の真空チャンバ10との間に設けられる。筒状部材41は、高圧力領域14に接続される開口部(回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の出射側開口部KO)と、第1の真空チャンバ10に接続される開口部(回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の入射側開口部KI)とを有し、真空路13を形成する。 The cylindrical member 41 is a cylindrical member that surrounds the space that becomes the vacuum path 13, and is provided between the high pressure region 14 and the first vacuum chamber 10. The cylindrical member 41 has an opening (the exit side opening KO of the rotating foil trap cover 44) that is connected to the high pressure region 14, and an opening (the entrance side opening KI of the rotating foil trap cover 44) that is connected to the first vacuum chamber 10, and forms the vacuum path 13.

 筒状部材41としては、真空路13の経路方向と交差する断面が高圧力領域14よりも大きい部材が用いられる。つまり、筒状部材41は、第1の真空チャンバ10側で高圧力領域14が形成する真空路13の太さを拡大する部材である。このような構成により、高圧力領域14から筒状部材41側に流出するバッファガス2は、後述する回転式ホイルトラップ43に巻き込まれながら広い空間に拡散され、第1の真空チャンバ10を排気する真空ポンプ(第1の真空ポンプ54)により排気される。このため、例えば高圧力領域14の圧力を短い距離で低下させることが可能となる。すなわち、筒状部材41を通過する間に真空路13の圧力が急激に低下する。これにより、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力は、高圧力領域14の圧力の影響をほとんど受けることなく維持される。 The cylindrical member 41 is a member whose cross section intersecting the path direction of the vacuum path 13 is larger than that of the high pressure region 14. In other words, the cylindrical member 41 is a member that expands the width of the vacuum path 13 formed by the high pressure region 14 on the first vacuum chamber 10 side. With this configuration, the buffer gas 2 flowing out from the high pressure region 14 to the cylindrical member 41 side is diffused into a wide space while being caught in the rotary foil trap 43 described later, and is exhausted by the vacuum pump (first vacuum pump 54) that exhausts the first vacuum chamber 10. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the pressure of the high pressure region 14, for example, over a short distance. In other words, the pressure of the vacuum path 13 drops suddenly while passing through the cylindrical member 41. As a result, the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10 is maintained almost without being affected by the pressure of the high pressure region 14.

 コンダクタンス低減部42は、高圧力領域14と第2の真空チャンバ20との間で真空路13のコンダクタンスを下げる部材である。コンダクタンス低減部42は、真空路13を形成する筒状の構造を持ち、高圧力領域14に接続される開口部(固定式ホイルトラップ45の入射端)と、第2の真空チャンバ20に接続される開口部(固定式ホイルトラップ45の出射端)とを有する。これら2つの開口部の間には、他の真空路13と比べて真空のコンダクタンスを低下させる部材が配置される。 The conductance reduction section 42 is a member that reduces the conductance of the vacuum path 13 between the high pressure region 14 and the second vacuum chamber 20. The conductance reduction section 42 has a cylindrical structure that forms the vacuum path 13, and has an opening (the entrance end of the fixed foil trap 45) that is connected to the high pressure region 14, and an opening (the exit end of the fixed foil trap 45) that is connected to the second vacuum chamber 20. Between these two openings, a member that reduces the conductance of the vacuum compared to the other vacuum paths 13 is placed.

 真空のコンダクタンスとは、バッファガス2の流れやすさを表すパラメータであり、例えば排気抵抗の逆数に対応する。コンダクタンスが低いほど排気抵抗は高くなり、バッファガス2は流れにくくなる。従って、コンダクタンス低減部42は、バッファガス2を流れにくくする部材であると言える。コンダクタンス低減部42を設けることで、第2の真空チャンバ20と高圧力領域14との間でバッファガス2が流れにくくなる。この結果、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力に影響を受けずに高圧力領域14を維持することが可能となり、導入側の圧力の変化を十分に吸収することが可能となる。 The vacuum conductance is a parameter that indicates how easily the buffer gas 2 flows, and corresponds to, for example, the inverse of the exhaust resistance. The lower the conductance, the higher the exhaust resistance, and the more difficult it is for the buffer gas 2 to flow. Therefore, the conductance reduction section 42 can be said to be a member that makes it difficult for the buffer gas 2 to flow. By providing the conductance reduction section 42, it becomes difficult for the buffer gas 2 to flow between the second vacuum chamber 20 and the high pressure region 14. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the high pressure region 14 without being affected by the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20, and it becomes possible to fully absorb changes in pressure on the introduction side.

 ここで、デブリを捕捉するための構成について説明する。図2に示すように、デブリ低減装置40は、回転式ホイルトラップ43と、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44と、固定式ホイルトラップ45と、固定式ホイルトラップカバー46とを有する。 Here, the configuration for capturing debris will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the debris reduction device 40 has a rotating foil trap 43, a rotating foil trap cover 44, a fixed foil trap 45, and a fixed foil trap cover 46.

 回転式ホイルトラップ43は、複数のホイルを回転させて複数のホイルがデブリと能動的に衝突する作用を加えたホイルトラップである。回転式ホイルトラップ43は、RFT(Rotating Foil Trap)ともいう。回転式ホイルトラップカバー44は、回転式ホイルトラップ43の外周を覆うように構成された筒状のカバーである。回転式ホイルトラップ43及び回転式ホイルトラップカバー44は、第1の真空チャンバ10側に配置される。 The rotating foil trap 43 is a foil trap in which multiple foils are rotated to actively collide with debris. The rotating foil trap 43 is also called an RFT (Rotating Foil Trap). The rotating foil trap cover 44 is a cylindrical cover configured to cover the outer periphery of the rotating foil trap 43. The rotating foil trap 43 and the rotating foil trap cover 44 are arranged on the first vacuum chamber 10 side.

 固定式ホイルトラップ45は、複数のホイルの位置が固定されたホイルトラップである。固定式ホイルトラップ45は、SFT(Static Foil Trap)ともいう。固定式ホイルトラップカバー46は、固定式ホイルトラップ45を覆うカバーである。固定式ホイルトラップカバー46は、固定式ホイルトラップ45を回転式ホイルトラップカバー44に接続する部材としても機能する。なお、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44と固定式ホイルトラップカバー46とが必ずしも完全につながっている必要はなく、例えば、高圧力領域14の圧力を維持することが可能な範囲であれば、多少隙間が存在していてもよい。固定式ホイルトラップ45及び固定式ホイルトラップカバー46は、第2の真空チャンバ20側に配置される。 The fixed foil trap 45 is a foil trap in which the positions of multiple foils are fixed. The fixed foil trap 45 is also called an SFT (Static Foil Trap). The fixed foil trap cover 46 is a cover that covers the fixed foil trap 45. The fixed foil trap cover 46 also functions as a member that connects the fixed foil trap 45 to the rotating foil trap cover 44. Note that the rotating foil trap cover 44 and the fixed foil trap cover 46 do not necessarily need to be completely connected, and for example, there may be some gaps as long as the pressure in the high pressure region 14 can be maintained. The fixed foil trap 45 and the fixed foil trap cover 46 are arranged on the second vacuum chamber 20 side.

 上記した真空路13、筒状部材41、及びコンダクタンス低減部42は、デブリを捕捉するためのこれらの構成を利用して実現される。本実施形態では、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44、固定式ホイルトラップカバー46、及び固定式ホイルトラップ45を接続して構成される中空の領域が、真空路13となる。また、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44が、筒状部材41として機能する。また、固定式ホイルトラップ45が、コンダクタンス低減部42として機能する。従って、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44から固定式ホイルトラップ45までの空間に高圧力領域14が形成される。各ホイルトラップ等の具体的な構成については後に詳しく説明する。 The above-mentioned vacuum path 13, cylindrical member 41, and conductance reduction section 42 are realized by utilizing these configurations for capturing debris. In this embodiment, the hollow area formed by connecting the rotating foil trap cover 44, the fixed foil trap cover 46, and the fixed foil trap 45 becomes the vacuum path 13. The rotating foil trap cover 44 also functions as the cylindrical member 41. The fixed foil trap 45 also functions as the conductance reduction section 42. Therefore, a high pressure area 14 is formed in the space from the rotating foil trap cover 44 to the fixed foil trap 45. The specific configuration of each foil trap etc. will be explained in detail later.

 [バッファガスの導入口]
 光源装置100には、バッファガス2を導入する導入口47が設けられる。バッファガス2は、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を変化させるガスとして機能する。バッファガス2の導入口47は、一つだけ設けられてもよいし、複数の導入口47が設けられてもよい。導入口47には、バッファガス2を通す配管が接続され、配管にはバッファガス2の流量を調整する流量調整バルブが取付けられる。
[Buffer gas inlet]
The light source device 100 is provided with an inlet 47 for introducing the buffer gas 2. The buffer gas 2 functions as a gas that changes the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20. Only one inlet 47 for the buffer gas 2 may be provided, or multiple inlets 47 may be provided. A pipe through which the buffer gas 2 passes is connected to the inlet 47, and a flow rate adjustment valve for adjusting the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 is attached to the pipe.

 本実施形態では、高圧力領域14は、デブリ低減装置40においてバッファガス2が導入される領域であり、デブリ低減装置40には、高圧力領域14につながる導入口47が設けられる。これにより、高圧力領域14に対して直接バッファガス2が供給され、高圧力領域14の圧力を高い状態で容易に維持することが可能となる。この導入口47は、例えば固定式ホイルトラップカバー46に設けられる。図2では、高圧力領域14につながる導入口47が点線の円により模式的に図示されている。本実施形態では、高圧力領域14につながる導入口47は、第1の導入口に相当する。 In this embodiment, the high pressure region 14 is the region in the debris mitigation device 40 where the buffer gas 2 is introduced, and the debris mitigation device 40 is provided with an inlet 47 that leads to the high pressure region 14. This allows the buffer gas 2 to be supplied directly to the high pressure region 14, making it possible to easily maintain the pressure of the high pressure region 14 at a high level. This inlet 47 is provided, for example, in the fixed foil trap cover 46. In FIG. 2, the inlet 47 that leads to the high pressure region 14 is diagrammatically illustrated by a dotted circle. In this embodiment, the inlet 47 that leads to the high pressure region 14 corresponds to the first inlet.

 また、第2の真空チャンバ20にバッファガスの導入口(図示省略)が設けられてもよい。この場合、第2の真空チャンバ20に対して直接バッファガス2が供給されるため、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を容易に変化させることが可能となる。本実施形態では、第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられる導入口は、第2の導入口に相当する。 Furthermore, a buffer gas inlet (not shown) may be provided in the second vacuum chamber 20. In this case, the buffer gas 2 is supplied directly to the second vacuum chamber 20, making it possible to easily change the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20. In this embodiment, the inlet provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 corresponds to the second inlet.

 このように、光源装置100は、EUV光1(プラズマP)が発生する第1の真空チャンバ10と、EUV光1を利用するための光学素子等が収容された第2の真空チャンバ20とを、デブリ低減装置40が形成する真空路13を介して接続した構造を備える。またデブリ低減装置40(高圧力領域14)、又はデブリ低減装置40よりも下流側(第2の真空チャンバ20側)に、バッファガス2の導入口47が設けられる。 In this way, the light source device 100 has a structure in which the first vacuum chamber 10 in which the EUV light 1 (plasma P) is generated is connected to the second vacuum chamber 20 in which optical elements and the like for utilizing the EUV light 1 are housed, via a vacuum path 13 formed by the debris reduction device 40. In addition, an inlet 47 for a buffer gas 2 is provided in the debris reduction device 40 (high pressure region 14) or downstream of the debris reduction device 40 (on the second vacuum chamber 20 side).

 バッファガス2としては、希ガスが用いられる。典型的には、バッファガス2は、アルゴンガスである。アルゴンガスは、他の原子との化合物を構成しにくい不活性ガスである。従ってアルゴンガスは、例えば水素ガスやハロゲンガス等の活性ガスと異なり、チャンバ内の金属等を腐食するといった心配がない。また、アルゴンガスは、不活性化等の処理をしなくても排気することが可能であるため、活性ガスを排気するような場合と比べて、排気システムの小型化や低コスト化が可能である。 A rare gas is used as the buffer gas 2. Typically, the buffer gas 2 is argon gas. Argon gas is an inert gas that does not easily form compounds with other atoms. Therefore, unlike active gases such as hydrogen gas and halogen gas, there is no need to worry about argon gas corroding metals in the chamber. In addition, since argon gas can be exhausted without any inactivation treatment, the exhaust system can be made smaller and less expensive than when exhausting active gases.

 さらに、EUV領域の光は、アルゴン原子(Ar)を励起および電離させることが知られている。そのため、EUV光1を照射することでアルゴンプラズマを生成することが可能となる。このように、アルゴンガス(バッファガス2)は、EUV光1により電離する電離ガスである。この現象を利用して、光源装置100では、後述するクリーニング運転等が行われる。 Furthermore, it is known that light in the EUV region excites and ionizes argon atoms (Ar). Therefore, it is possible to generate argon plasma by irradiating the EUV light 1. In this way, argon gas (buffer gas 2) is an ionized gas that is ionized by the EUV light 1. Using this phenomenon, the light source device 100 performs cleaning operations, which will be described later.

 なお、アルゴン原子は、13.5nmの波長に関しても若干の吸収があるものの、30nm-80nmの光と比べると、吸収量が一桁低い。このため、アクティニック波長となる13.5nmの減衰は少なく、アルゴンガスをバッファガス2として用いた場合でも十分な光量を確保することが可能である。 Although argon atoms have some absorption at wavelengths of 13.5 nm, the amount of absorption is an order of magnitude lower than that of light at 30 nm to 80 nm. Therefore, there is little attenuation of the actinic wavelength of 13.5 nm, and it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of light even when argon gas is used as buffer gas 2.

 [仕切り板]
 図2に示すように、第1の真空チャンバ10には、デブリ低減装置40と放電モジュール31との間に、第1の仕切り板16及び第2の仕切り板17が設けられる。
[Partition plate]
As shown in FIG. 2 , in the first vacuum chamber 10 , a first partition plate 16 and a second partition plate 17 are provided between the debris mitigation device 40 and the discharge module 31 .

 第1の仕切り板16は、デブリ低減装置40(回転式ホイルトラップカバー44)よりも平面サイズが大きい板状の部材であり、デブリ低減装置40のプラズマPに向けられる側を覆うように配置される。第1の仕切り板16は、第2の仕切り板17が取付けられる開口部16aを有する。第1の仕切り板16は、例えば液相のプラズマ原料の蒸気(ここではスズ蒸気)が、デブリ低減装置40側の空間や第2の真空チャンバ20等に回り込むことを制限する。 The first partition plate 16 is a plate-shaped member with a larger planar size than the debris reduction device 40 (rotary foil trap cover 44), and is arranged to cover the side of the debris reduction device 40 facing the plasma P. The first partition plate 16 has an opening 16a to which the second partition plate 17 is attached. The first partition plate 16 restricts, for example, liquid-phase plasma raw material vapor (tin vapor in this case) from leaking into the space on the debris reduction device 40 side or into the second vacuum chamber 20, etc.

 第2の仕切り板17は、第1の仕切り板16に設けられた開口部16aを覆う板状の部材であり、第1の仕切り板16のプラズマPに向けられる側に固定される。第2の仕切り板17は、第2の真空チャンバ20に導入するEUV光1を通す開口部17aと、所定の計測機器(第1の光量モニタ25a)に導入するEUV光1を通す開口部17bとを有する。第2の仕切り板17は、放電により発生するプラズマPからデブリ低減装置40に加わる熱負荷を低減するとともに、デブリ低減装置40に向かうデブリ量を制限する。 The second partition plate 17 is a plate-shaped member that covers the opening 16a provided in the first partition plate 16, and is fixed to the side of the first partition plate 16 that faces the plasma P. The second partition plate 17 has an opening 17a through which the EUV light 1 to be introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20 passes, and an opening 17b through which the EUV light 1 to be introduced into a specified measuring instrument (first light intensity monitor 25a) passes. The second partition plate 17 reduces the thermal load applied to the debris mitigation device 40 from the plasma P generated by the discharge, and limits the amount of debris heading toward the debris mitigation device 40.

 [排気システム]
 図2に示すように、光源装置100は、第1の真空チャンバ10に接続された第1の真空バルブ50及び第1の真空計51と、第2の真空チャンバ20に接続された第2の真空バルブ52及び第2の真空計53を有する。
[Exhaust system]
As shown in FIG. 2, the light source device 100 has a first vacuum valve 50 and a first vacuum gauge 51 connected to the first vacuum chamber 10, and a second vacuum valve 52 and a second vacuum gauge 53 connected to the second vacuum chamber 20.

 第1の真空チャンバ10には、排気孔18と、計測孔19とが設けられる。第1の真空バルブ50は、排気孔18に接続され、第1の真空チャンバ10を第1の真空ポンプ54につなぐバルブである。第1の真空計51は、計測孔19に接続され、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力を検出する。また、第2の真空チャンバ20には、排気孔28と、計測孔29とが設けられる。第2の真空バルブ52は、排気孔28に接続され、第2の真空チャンバ20を第2の真空ポンプ55につなぐバルブである。第2の真空計53は、計測孔29に接続され、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を検出する。 The first vacuum chamber 10 is provided with an exhaust hole 18 and a measurement hole 19. The first vacuum valve 50 is connected to the exhaust hole 18 and is a valve that connects the first vacuum chamber 10 to the first vacuum pump 54. The first vacuum gauge 51 is connected to the measurement hole 19 and detects the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10. The second vacuum chamber 20 is provided with an exhaust hole 28 and a measurement hole 29. The second vacuum valve 52 is connected to the exhaust hole 28 and is a valve that connects the second vacuum chamber 20 to the second vacuum pump 55. The second vacuum gauge 53 is connected to the measurement hole 29 and detects the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.

 このように、光源装置100は、第1の真空チャンバ10及び第2の真空チャンバ20は、それぞれが個別に排気される。また各真空チャンバをつなぐ真空路13には、上記した高圧力領域14が形成され、バッファガスの流れが制限される。これにより、第1の真空チャンバ10及び第2の真空チャンバ20は、真空路13で接続されているものの、それぞれの内部空間を独立に排気する差動排気が可能となる。 In this way, in the light source device 100, the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 are each evacuated separately. Furthermore, the high pressure region 14 described above is formed in the vacuum path 13 connecting each vacuum chamber, restricting the flow of buffer gas. As a result, although the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 are connected by the vacuum path 13, differential evacuation is possible, which evacuates each internal space independently.

 本実施形態では、主に第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力が調整される。このため、光源装置100には、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を調整する圧力調整機構が設けられる。圧力調整機構は、例えば第2の真空チャンバ20から流出するバッファガス2の量、又は、第2の真空チャンバ20に流入するバッファガス2の量を調節する機構である。 In this embodiment, the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 is mainly adjusted. For this reason, the light source device 100 is provided with a pressure adjustment mechanism that adjusts the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20. The pressure adjustment mechanism is, for example, a mechanism that adjusts the amount of buffer gas 2 flowing out of the second vacuum chamber 20, or the amount of buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20.

 例えば、導入口47から導入されるバッファガス2の流量を調整する流量調整バルブ(図示省略)が、圧力調整機構として用いられる。この場合、例えばバッファガス2の流量を増やすことで第2の真空チャンバ20に流入するバッファガス2の流量が増え、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を上昇させることが可能である。 For example, a flow rate adjustment valve (not shown) that adjusts the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 introduced from the inlet 47 is used as the pressure adjustment mechanism. In this case, for example, by increasing the flow rate of the buffer gas 2, the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20 increases, and it is possible to increase the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20.

 また例えば、第2の真空チャンバ20の排気量を調整する第2の真空バルブ52が、圧力調整機構として用いられる。この場合、例えば排気量を減らすことで第2の真空チャンバ20から流出するバッファガス2の流量が減り、結果として第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を上昇させることが可能である。本実施形態では、第2の真空バルブ52は、排気量調整バルブに相当する。 Also, for example, the second vacuum valve 52 that adjusts the exhaust volume of the second vacuum chamber 20 is used as a pressure adjustment mechanism. In this case, for example, by reducing the exhaust volume, the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing out from the second vacuum chamber 20 is reduced, and as a result, it is possible to increase the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20. In this embodiment, the second vacuum valve 52 corresponds to an exhaust volume adjustment valve.

 なお、圧力調整機構として、バッファガスの流量調整バルブと、第2の真空バルブ52との両方が用いられてもよいし、どちらか一方が用いられてもよい。また、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を調整可能な機構であれば、上記以外の機構が用いられもよい。圧力調整機構を用いることで、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力を容易に調整することが可能となり、様々な運転モードを実現することが可能となる。 As the pressure adjustment mechanism, both the buffer gas flow rate adjustment valve and the second vacuum valve 52 may be used, or either one may be used. Also, any mechanism other than the above may be used as long as it is capable of adjusting the pressure of the second vacuum chamber 20. By using the pressure adjustment mechanism, for example, it becomes possible to easily adjust the pressure of the second vacuum chamber, making it possible to realize various operating modes.

 [光量モニタ]
 光源装置100は、EUV光1の光量を検出する光量モニタを有する。ここでは、第1の光量モニタ25aと、第2の光量モニタ25bとが設けられる。第1の光量モニタ25aは、第1の真空チャンバ10の右側の側壁10cに接続され、回転式ホイルトラップ43を通過したEUV光1を検出する。従って、第1の光量モニタ25aは、プラズマPからのEUV光1の光量、すなわちプラズマPの発光強度を検出するセンサとして機能する。
[Light level monitor]
The light source device 100 has a light intensity monitor that detects the amount of EUV light 1. Here, a first light intensity monitor 25a and a second light intensity monitor 25b are provided. The first light intensity monitor 25a is connected to the right side wall 10c of the first vacuum chamber 10, and detects the EUV light 1 that has passed through the rotary foil trap 43. Therefore, the first light intensity monitor 25a functions as a sensor that detects the amount of EUV light 1 from the plasma P, i.e., the emission intensity of the plasma P.

 第2の光量モニタ25bは、第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられEUV光1の光量を検出する。例えば、光学素子21(ここでは筒形の集光ミラー)を通過したEUV光が照射される位置に第2の光量モニタ25bが設けられる。これに限定されず、例えば反射ミラー等を使って分岐させたEUV光1を検出してもよい。これにより、第2の光量モニタ25bは、集光ミラーや反射ミラーを介して導光されたEUV光1の光量を検出することが可能となる。 The second light intensity monitor 25b is provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 and detects the amount of EUV light 1. For example, the second light intensity monitor 25b is provided at a position where the EUV light that has passed through the optical element 21 (here, a cylindrical collector mirror) is irradiated. Without being limited to this, for example, the EUV light 1 that has been branched using a reflecting mirror or the like may be detected. This allows the second light intensity monitor 25b to detect the amount of EUV light 1 that has been guided through the collector mirror or reflecting mirror.

 例えば集光ミラーや反射ミラーの表面がデブリにより汚染されると、EUV光の反射率が低下し、集光されるEUV光1や反射されるEUV光1の光量が低下する。従って、第2の光量モニタ25bの検出結果は、集光ミラーや反射ミラーの汚染の度合いを表すパラメータとして機能する。この点を利用して、第2の光量モニタ25bの検出結果は、クリーニング運転を行うかどうかの判定に用いられる。 For example, if the surface of the collector mirror or reflector mirror becomes contaminated by debris, the reflectivity of the EUV light decreases, and the amount of EUV light 1 that is collected or reflected decreases. Therefore, the detection result of the second light amount monitor 25b functions as a parameter that indicates the degree of contamination of the collector mirror or reflector mirror. Taking advantage of this, the detection result of the second light amount monitor 25b is used to determine whether or not to perform a cleaning operation.

 [デブリ低減装置の各部の構成]
 以下では、デブリ低減装置40を構成する各部の構成について具体的に説明する。
[Configuration of each part of the debris mitigation device]
The configuration of each part of the debris mitigation device 40 will be specifically described below.

 [回転式ホイルトラップ]
 図3は、回転式ホイルトラップ43の構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。図4は、回転式ホイルトラップ43の構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。図3及び図4に示すように、回転式ホイルトラップ43は、複数のホイル(ブレード)Fと、中心支柱60と、外側リング61とを有する。また中心支柱60は、回転軸を中心に回転する軸部材63に接続される。
[Rotary foil trap]
Fig. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap 43. Fig. 4 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap 43. As shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the rotary foil trap 43 has a plurality of foils (blades) F, a central support 60, and an outer ring 61. The central support 60 is connected to a shaft member 63 that rotates around a rotation axis.

 複数のホイルFは、薄膜または薄い平板である。中心支柱60は、複数のホイルFを放射状に支持する部材である。外側リング61は、中心支柱60に同心に配置され、中心支柱60から放射状に延びる各ホイルFの先端に接続される。本実施形態では、中心支柱60は、回転部材に相当する。各ホイルFは、ほぼ等しい角間隔をおいて中心支柱60の周りに放射状に配置される。この時、各ホイルFは、中心支柱60の中心軸線C0を含む平面上にある。回転式ホイルトラップ43の材料は、例えば、タングステン(W)またはモリブデン(Mo)などの高融点金属である。 The multiple foils F are thin films or thin flat plates. The central support 60 is a member that radially supports the multiple foils F. The outer ring 61 is arranged concentrically around the central support 60 and is connected to the tip of each foil F that extends radially from the central support 60. In this embodiment, the central support 60 corresponds to a rotating member. Each foil F is radially arranged around the central support 60 at approximately equal angular intervals. At this time, each foil F is on a plane that includes the central axis C0 of the central support 60. The material of the rotating foil trap 43 is, for example, a high-melting point metal such as tungsten (W) or molybdenum (Mo).

 図4に示すように、回転式ホイルトラップ43の複数のホイルFは、プラズマP(発光点)から第2の真空チャンバ20に向かうEUV光1を遮らないように、EUV光1の光線方向に平行に配置される。すなわち、各ホイルFが中心支柱60の中心軸線C0を含む平面上に配置された回転式ホイルトラップ43は、中心支柱60の中心軸線C0の延長線上にプラズマP(発光点)が存在するように配置される(図11参照)。これにより、中心支柱60および外側リング61を除けば、EUV光は各ホイルFの厚みの分のみ遮光され、回転式ホイルトラップ43を通過するEUV光1の割合(透過率ともいう)を最大にすることが可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 4, the multiple foils F of the rotating foil trap 43 are arranged parallel to the light direction of the EUV light 1 so as not to block the EUV light 1 traveling from the plasma P (light-emitting point) to the second vacuum chamber 20. That is, the rotating foil trap 43, in which each foil F is arranged on a plane including the central axis C0 of the central support 60, is arranged so that the plasma P (light-emitting point) is on an extension of the central axis C0 of the central support 60 (see FIG. 11). As a result, except for the central support 60 and the outer ring 61, the EUV light is blocked only by the thickness of each foil F, making it possible to maximize the proportion of EUV light 1 that passes through the rotating foil trap 43 (also called the transmittance).

 [回転式ホイルトラップカバー]
 図5は、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。図6は、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。回転式ホイルトラップカバー44は、回転式ホイルトラップ43の外周部を包囲して、回転式ホイルトラップ43から飛散するデブリを捕集する。回転式ホイルトラップカバー44を設けることで、回転式ホイルトラップ43により捕捉されたデブリが第1の真空チャンバ10の内部に飛散するのを防止することが可能となる。
[Rotating foil trap cover]
Fig. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap cover 44. Fig. 6 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the rotary foil trap cover 44. The rotary foil trap cover 44 surrounds the outer periphery of the rotary foil trap 43 and collects debris scattered from the rotary foil trap 43. By providing the rotary foil trap cover 44, it is possible to prevent the debris captured by the rotary foil trap 43 from scattering inside the first vacuum chamber 10.

 以下では、EUV光1が入射する側(プラズマPに向けられる側)を入射側と記載し、その反対側を出射側と記載する。回転式ホイルトラップカバー44は、入射側開口部KI、出射側開口部KO、及び出射側開口部KO'を備える。 In the following, the side where the EUV light 1 is incident (the side that is directed toward the plasma P) is referred to as the incident side, and the opposite side is referred to as the exit side. The rotating foil trap cover 44 has an incident side opening KI, an exit side opening KO, and an exit side opening KO'.

 入射側開口部KIは、回転式ホイルトラップ43に入射するEUV光が遮光されない位置に設けられる。出射側開口部KOは、第2の仕切り板17の開口部17aを通過して入射側開口部KIに侵入するEUV光1が遮光されない位置に設けられる。出射側開口部KOを通過したEUV光1は、第2の真空チャンバ20に導入される光となる。出射側開口部KO'は、第2の仕切り板17の開口部17bを通過して入射側開口部KIに侵入するEUV光1が遮光されない位置に設けられる。出射側開口部KO'を通過したEUV光1は、第1の光量モニタ25aに導入される光となる。 The entrance side opening KI is provided at a position where the EUV light entering the rotating foil trap 43 is not blocked. The exit side opening KO is provided at a position where the EUV light 1 passing through the opening 17a of the second partition plate 17 and entering the entrance side opening KI is not blocked. The EUV light 1 that passes through the exit side opening KO becomes the light that is introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20. The exit side opening KO' is provided at a position where the EUV light 1 that passes through the opening 17b of the second partition plate 17 and entering the entrance side opening KI is not blocked. The EUV light 1 that passes through the exit side opening KO' becomes the light that is introduced into the first light quantity monitor 25a.

 また回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の出射側の面には、回転式ホイルトラップ43の回転軸となる軸部材63を通す貫通孔64が設けられる。なお貫通孔64の端部は、例えば第1の真空チャンバ10の内壁等に接続され、解放端にはならない。また回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の下部には、デブリを排出するための排出管65が設けられる。 In addition, a through hole 64 is provided on the emission side surface of the rotary foil trap cover 44, through which an axis member 63 serving as the rotation axis of the rotary foil trap 43 passes. Note that the end of the through hole 64 is connected, for example, to the inner wall of the first vacuum chamber 10, and is not an open end. In addition, an exhaust pipe 65 for exhausting debris is provided at the bottom of the rotary foil trap cover 44.

 回転式ホイルトラップ43により捕捉されたデブリの少なくとも一部は、遠心力により回転式ホイルトラップ43のホイルF上を径方向に移動し、ホイルFの端部から離脱して、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の内面に付着する。回転式ホイルトラップカバー44は、図示しない加熱手段(カバー加熱部)や、EUV光の放射に伴う輻射によって加熱され、当該加熱により回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の内面に付着したデブリは固化せず、液相状態を保持する。回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の内面に付着したデブリは、重力により回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の下部に集まり、排出管65を介して回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の外に排出されて廃原料となる。廃原料となったデブリは、図示しないデブリ収容部に収容される。 At least a portion of the debris captured by the rotating foil trap 43 moves radially on the foil F of the rotating foil trap 43 due to centrifugal force, detaches from the end of the foil F, and adheres to the inner surface of the rotating foil trap cover 44. The rotating foil trap cover 44 is heated by a heating means (cover heating section) not shown or by radiation associated with the emission of EUV light, and the debris adhered to the inner surface of the rotating foil trap cover 44 by this heating does not solidify but remains in a liquid state. The debris adhered to the inner surface of the rotating foil trap cover 44 collects at the bottom of the rotating foil trap cover 44 due to gravity, and is discharged outside the rotating foil trap cover 44 via the discharge pipe 65 to become waste material. The debris that has become waste material is stored in a debris storage section not shown.

 回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の内部空間は、回転式ホイルトラップ43を収容することが可能なサイズである。これは、第2の真空チャンバ20につながる出射側開口部KOの直径に比べて、十分に大きいサイズとなる。このように、出射側開口部KOから見ると、真空路13となる空間の広さ(経路方向と交差する断面積)が急激に広がることになる。これに加え、回転式ホイルトラップの回転の効果も相まって、バッファガス2の圧力を急激に低下させることが可能となっている。 The internal space of the rotary foil trap cover 44 is large enough to accommodate the rotary foil trap 43. This is a size sufficiently larger than the diameter of the exit opening KO that connects to the second vacuum chamber 20. In this way, when viewed from the exit opening KO, the width of the space that becomes the vacuum path 13 (the cross-sectional area that intersects with the path direction) suddenly expands. In addition, the effect of the rotation of the rotary foil trap is also combined, making it possible to suddenly reduce the pressure of the buffer gas 2.

 [固定式ホイルトラップ]
 図7は、固定式ホイルトラップ45の構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。図8は、固定式ホイルトラップ45の構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。固定式ホイルトラップ45は、複数のホイルFを固定したホイルトラップFTであり、回転式ホイルトラップ43の下流側に配置され、回転式ホイルトラップ43を通過したデブリを捕捉する。固定式ホイルトラップ45は、第1の真空チャンバ10の貫通孔12から取り出されるEUV光1の光線束(EUV取出光)が通る中心経路を基準に配置される。中心経路は、例えばプラズマPの発光点と貫通孔12の中心点とを結ぶ経路である。
[Fixed foil trap]
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap 45. FIG. 8 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap 45. The fixed foil trap 45 is a foil trap FT having a plurality of foils F fixed thereto, and is disposed downstream of the rotary foil trap 43 to capture debris that has passed through the rotary foil trap 43. The fixed foil trap 45 is disposed based on a central path through which a ray bundle (EUV extracted light) of the EUV light 1 extracted from the through hole 12 of the first vacuum chamber 10 passes. The central path is, for example, a path connecting the emission point of the plasma P and the center point of the through hole 12.

 図7は、EUV光の中心経路に沿って固定式ホイルトラップ45を切断した図である。
また図8は、EUV光の中心経路の方向から固定式ホイルトラップ45を見た図である。
図7および図8に示すように、固定式ホイルトラップ45は、真空路13に配置される複数のホイルFと、複数のホイルFを固定する固定枠66とを備える。本実施形態では、固定枠66は、固定部材に相当する。
FIG. 7 is a cut through the fixed foil trap 45 along the central path of the EUV light.
FIG. 8 is a view of the fixed foil trap 45 viewed from the direction of the central path of the EUV light.
7 and 8, the fixed foil trap 45 includes a plurality of foils F arranged in the vacuum path 13, and a fixed frame 66 that fixes the plurality of foils F. In the present embodiment, the fixed frame 66 corresponds to a fixing member.

 図8に示すように、複数のホイルFは、EUV光1の中心経路の方向から見て、それぞれ等間隔に配置される。また、固定枠66は、例えば、正面から見て矩形状となっている。なお、固定枠66の外形は、任意の形状であってよい。さらに、複数のホイルFは、図7に示すように、中心経路に沿って切断した断面では、EUV光の光線方向に伸びるように放射状に配置される。 As shown in FIG. 8, the multiple foils F are arranged at equal intervals when viewed from the direction of the central path of the EUV light 1. Furthermore, the fixed frame 66 is, for example, rectangular when viewed from the front. The outer shape of the fixed frame 66 may be any shape. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7, the multiple foils F are arranged radially so as to extend in the direction of the beam of the EUV light in a cross section cut along the central path.

 固定式ホイルトラップ45の複数のホイルFは、固定式ホイルトラップ45が配置された空間を細かく分割することにより、その部分のコンダクタンスを下げる働きをする。例えば固定式ホイルトラップ45には、高圧力領域14からバッファガス2が供給される。
バッファガス2は、固定式ホイルトラップ45を流れにくいため、ホイルFの間に滞留しやすくなる。
The multiple foils F of the fixed foil trap 45 serve to reduce the conductance of the portion by finely dividing the space in which the fixed foil trap 45 is disposed. For example, the buffer gas 2 is supplied to the fixed foil trap 45 from the high pressure region 14.
The buffer gas 2 is less likely to flow through the fixed foil trap 45 and is therefore more likely to remain between the foils F.

 回転式ホイルトラップ43で捕捉できなかった高速のデブリは、固定式ホイルトラップ45に滞留したガスとの衝突確率が上がるために速度が低下する。また、ガスとの衝突によりデブリの進行方向も変わる。固定式ホイルトラップ45は、このようにして速度が低下して進行方向が変わったデブリを、ホイルFまたは固定枠66により捕捉する。このように、回転式ホイルトラップ43と固定式ホイルトラップ45とを設けることで、デブリを十分に捕捉することが可能となる。 High-speed debris that cannot be captured by the rotating foil trap 43 slows down due to an increased probability of collision with the gas trapped in the fixed foil trap 45. Collisions with gas also cause the debris to change direction. The fixed foil trap 45 captures the debris that has slowed down and changed direction in this way using the foil F or fixed frame 66. In this way, by providing the rotating foil trap 43 and the fixed foil trap 45, it is possible to adequately capture the debris.

 また、固定式ホイルトラップ45は、そのコンダクタンスが低いため、第2の真空チャンバ20へのバッファガス2の流出、及び、第2の真空チャンバ20からのバッファガス2の流入を制限する。これにより、例えば高圧力領域14のバッファガス2が漏れにくくなるとともに、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力変化も、高圧力領域14の圧力に影響を与えにくくなる。これにより、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力に係わらず、高圧力領域14を維持することが可能となる。 Furthermore, since the fixed foil trap 45 has low conductance, it limits the outflow of the buffer gas 2 to the second vacuum chamber 20 and the inflow of the buffer gas 2 from the second vacuum chamber 20. This makes it difficult for the buffer gas 2 in the high pressure region 14 to leak, for example, and also makes it difficult for pressure changes in the second vacuum chamber 20 to affect the pressure in the high pressure region 14. This makes it possible to maintain the high pressure region 14 regardless of the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20.

 [固定式ホイルトラップカバー]
 図9は、固定式ホイルトラップカバーの構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。図10は、固定式ホイルトラップカバーの構成例を示す模式的な正面図である。固定式ホイルトラップカバー46は、固定式ホイルトラップ45を包囲するカバーであり、固定式ホイルトラップ45を回転式ホイルトラップカバー44に接続する部材である。固定式ホイルトラップカバー46は、開口部67及び導入口47が設けられた支持板68と、支持板68の外縁からEUV光1出射側に延びる包囲部69とを有する。
[Fixed foil trap cover]
Fig. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap cover. Fig. 10 is a schematic front view showing a configuration example of the fixed foil trap cover. The fixed foil trap cover 46 is a cover that surrounds the fixed foil trap 45, and is a member that connects the fixed foil trap 45 to the rotary foil trap cover 44. The fixed foil trap cover 46 has a support plate 68 in which an opening 67 and an introduction port 47 are provided, and an enclosure part 69 that extends from the outer edge of the support plate 68 to the EUV light 1 emission side.

 支持板68は、固定式ホイルトラップ45が固定される板である。包囲部69は、固定式ホイルトラップ45の側面を囲むように形成される。支持板68に設けられた開口部67は、EUV光1の入射口である。また支持板68の内部には、開口部67と連通するように、バッファガス2を導入するための導入口47が設けられる。ここでは、開口部67を挟んで互いに反対側となる位置に2つの導入口47が設けられる。導入口47からバッファガス2が供給されることで、開口部67を構成する空間は、高圧力領域14となる。 The support plate 68 is a plate to which the fixed foil trap 45 is fixed. The surrounding portion 69 is formed to surround the side of the fixed foil trap 45. The opening 67 provided in the support plate 68 is the entrance port for the EUV light 1. An inlet 47 for introducing buffer gas 2 is provided inside the support plate 68 so as to communicate with the opening 67. Here, two inlets 47 are provided at positions opposite each other with the opening 67 in between. When buffer gas 2 is supplied from the inlet 47, the space constituting the opening 67 becomes the high pressure region 14.

 図11は、デブリ低減装置40の構成例を示す模式的な断面図である。図11に示すデブリ低減装置40は、上記した回転式ホイルトラップ43、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44、固定式ホイルトラップ45、及び固定式ホイルトラップカバー46を組み立てて構成される。 FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example configuration of the debris reduction device 40. The debris reduction device 40 shown in FIG. 11 is configured by assembling the above-mentioned rotating foil trap 43, rotating foil trap cover 44, fixed foil trap 45, and fixed foil trap cover 46.

 具体的には、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の内部に、回転式ホイルトラップ43が配置される。また回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の後方には、出射側開口部KOと開口部67とが重なるように、固定式ホイルトラップカバー46の支持板68が接続される。
また固定式ホイルトラップカバー46の内部では、支持板68の開口部67を覆うように固定式ホイルトラップ45の固定枠66が接続される。また、固定式ホイルトラップカバー46の後端は、図示しないフランジ等を介して、第2の真空チャンバ20の貫通孔22に接続される。
Specifically, the rotary foil trap 43 is disposed inside the rotary foil trap cover 44. Further, the support plate 68 of the fixed foil trap cover 46 is connected to the rear of the rotary foil trap cover 44 so that the exit side opening KO and the opening 67 overlap with each other.
Moreover, inside the fixed foil trap cover 46, the fixed frame 66 of the fixed foil trap 45 is connected so as to cover the opening 67 of the support plate 68. Moreover, the rear end of the fixed foil trap cover 46 is connected to the through hole 22 of the second vacuum chamber 20 via a flange or the like (not shown).

 このような構成により、デブリ低減装置40内部の高圧力領域14を通る真空路13により、第1の真空チャンバ10と第2の真空チャンバ20とが接続される。以下では、デブリ低減装置40を用いた場合の、光源装置100内の圧力について具体的に説明する。 With this configuration, the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20 are connected by a vacuum path 13 that passes through a high pressure region 14 inside the debris reduction device 40. Below, we will specifically explain the pressure inside the light source device 100 when the debris reduction device 40 is used.

 [光源装置内の圧力]
 図12は、光源装置内の圧力のシミュレーション結果を示すグラフである。このシミュレーションには、図11に示すデブリ低減装置40のモデルを形成し、モデルにおける圧力の分布を算出した。図12には、EUV光1の中心経路Oに沿った圧力のプロファイルを図示している。グラフの横軸は、中心経路Oに沿った距離である。ここでは、プラズマPから第2の真空チャンバ20内の測定端までの距離Dに対する相対距離を用いている。
グラフの縦軸は、各位置での圧力[Pa]である。
[Pressure inside the light source device]
Fig. 12 is a graph showing the results of a simulation of the pressure inside the light source device. For this simulation, a model of the debris mitigation device 40 shown in Fig. 11 was created, and the pressure distribution in the model was calculated. Fig. 12 shows a pressure profile along the central path O of the EUV light 1. The horizontal axis of the graph is the distance along the central path O. Here, a relative distance with respect to the distance D from the plasma P to the measurement end inside the second vacuum chamber 20 is used.
The vertical axis of the graph represents pressure [Pa] at each position.

 またグラフ上の点Oaは、プラズマPの発生位置に対応する。点Obは、真空路13の入射端(回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の入射側開口部KI)に対応する。点Ocは、高圧力領域14(支持板68の開口部67)に対応する。点Odは、真空路13の出射端(固定式ホイルトラップ45の後端)に対応する。 Point Oa on the graph corresponds to the generation position of plasma P. Point Ob corresponds to the entrance end of vacuum path 13 (entrance side opening KI of rotary foil trap cover 44). Point Oc corresponds to high pressure region 14 (opening 67 of support plate 68). Point Od corresponds to the exit end of vacuum path 13 (rear end of fixed foil trap 45).

 図12には、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を0.7Paに設定した場合の圧力プロファイル(実線のグラフ)と、P2を5Paに設定した場合の圧力プロファイル(点線のグラフ)とが示されている。なお、いずれのグラフにおいても第1の真空チャンバ10を排気する第1の真空ポンプ54の排気量およびバッファガス2の流量は一定値に設定してシミュレーションを行った。結果として第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1は3Paになった。 FIG. 12 shows the pressure profile (solid line graph) when the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to 0.7 Pa, and the pressure profile (dotted line graph) when P2 is set to 5 Pa. In both graphs, the simulation was performed with the exhaust volume of the first vacuum pump 54 that evacuates the first vacuum chamber 10 and the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 set to constant values. As a result, the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 became 3 Pa.

 例えば、点Ocを中心とする斜線の領域では高い圧力が維持される。この斜線の領域が、高圧力領域14である。例えば回転式ホイルトラップカバー44の入射側開口部KIと、固定式ホイルトラップカバー46の開口部67とが形成する領域が、高圧力領域14となる。このシミュレーションから、P2=0.7Paとした場合に、点Oa近傍の圧力に対して高圧力領域14の圧力Phは18Pa以上になる。 For example, high pressure is maintained in the shaded area centered on point Oc. This shaded area is high pressure area 14. For example, the area formed by the entrance side opening KI of the rotating foil trap cover 44 and the opening 67 of the fixed foil trap cover 46 becomes high pressure area 14. From this simulation, when P2 = 0.7 Pa, the pressure Ph of high pressure area 14 is 18 Pa or more compared to the pressure near point Oa.

 高圧力領域14から第2の真空チャンバ20側の点Odまでは、固定式ホイルトラップ45が設けられ、圧力が略一様に低下する。また、高圧力領域14から第1の真空チャンバ10側の点Obまでは、回転式ホイルトラップ43を含む回転式ホイルトラップカバー44が設けられるが、この場合も点Obにかけて圧力が低下する。なお圧力の勾配が屈曲している部分は、回転式ホイルトラップ43の入射側の端部に対応する。点Obに至るまでの圧力の減少は、回転式ホイルトラップカバー44内にバッファガス2が急激に広がることで生じる。 A fixed foil trap 45 is provided from the high pressure region 14 to point Od on the second vacuum chamber 20 side, and the pressure drops almost uniformly. A rotary foil trap cover 44 including a rotary foil trap 43 is provided from the high pressure region 14 to point Ob on the first vacuum chamber 10 side, and the pressure also drops toward point Ob. The part where the pressure gradient is bent corresponds to the end of the entrance side of the rotary foil trap 43. The drop in pressure up to point Ob occurs due to the sudden expansion of the buffer gas 2 inside the rotary foil trap cover 44.

 ここで、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2が0.7Paである状態から、P2が5Paである状態に圧力が増加したとする。高圧力領域14の圧力Phは、P2の増加に伴い多少増加する。ここでは、Phの増加量は、0.5Pa程度であり、P2の増加量(4.3Pa)に比べると1/8程度となる。このように、Phの変化量は、P2の変化量に比べて十分に小さい。つまり、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2の変化は、高圧力領域14と回転式ホイルトラップ43でのガス拡散効果により、ほとんど吸収されてしまい、第1の真空チャンバ10には伝わりにくい。 Now, suppose that the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 increases from 0.7 Pa to 5 Pa. The pressure Ph in the high pressure region 14 increases slightly as P2 increases. Here, the increase in Ph is about 0.5 Pa, which is about 1/8 of the increase in P2 (4.3 Pa). In this way, the change in Ph is sufficiently small compared to the change in P2. In other words, the change in pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is almost entirely absorbed by the gas diffusion effect in the high pressure region 14 and the rotary foil trap 43, and is not easily transmitted to the first vacuum chamber 10.

 さらに、P2が増加しても、高圧力領域14から第1の真空チャンバ10側の圧力の分布はほとんど変化しない。例えば点Oaから点Obまでの圧力(プラズマPからデブリ低減装置40の入射端までの圧力)は、P2の増減に係わらず略一定(3Pa程度)である。これは、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2によらず、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1が略一定であることを意味する。 Furthermore, even if P2 increases, the pressure distribution from the high pressure region 14 to the first vacuum chamber 10 side hardly changes. For example, the pressure from point Oa to point Ob (the pressure from the plasma P to the entrance end of the debris mitigation device 40) is approximately constant (about 3 Pa) regardless of whether P2 increases or decreases. This means that the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 is approximately constant, regardless of the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20.

 このように、デブリ低減装置40では、真空路13を遮るように高圧力領域14を発生させることで、P1とP2とを分離することが可能となる。この結果、EUV光の導入側の圧力P2の変化による光源側の圧力P1の変化を抑制することが可能となる。 In this way, the debris reduction device 40 can separate P1 and P2 by generating a high pressure region 14 that blocks the vacuum path 13. As a result, it is possible to suppress changes in pressure P1 on the light source side caused by changes in pressure P2 on the EUV light introduction side.

 またデブリ低減装置40でのデブリ捕捉能力を踏まえて、高圧力領域14の圧力Phは、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1の6倍以上の圧力に設定することが好ましい。これにより、プラズマPからのデブリを十分に捕捉しつつ、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1を確実に維持することが可能となる。 In addition, taking into account the debris capture capability of the debris reduction device 40, it is preferable to set the pressure Ph of the high pressure region 14 to a pressure that is six times or more the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10. This makes it possible to reliably maintain the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 while adequately capturing debris from the plasma P.

 図13は、第1の真空チャンバ10及び第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力の関係を示すグラフである。図13には、光源装置100において実測した第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1と、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2との関係が示されている。グラフの縦軸はP1であり、横軸はP2である。ここでは、P1がおよそ2Paとなるように第1の真空チャンバ10の排気量を一定にした状態で、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を変化させた。 FIG. 13 is a graph showing the relationship between the pressures of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the second vacuum chamber 20. FIG. 13 shows the relationship between the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20, which were actually measured in the light source device 100. The vertical axis of the graph is P1, and the horizontal axis is P2. Here, the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was changed while keeping the exhaust volume of the first vacuum chamber 10 constant so that P1 was approximately 2 Pa.

 図13のグラフに示すように、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を20Pa以下の範囲で変化させても、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1は2Pa前後の値を示すことがわかった。すなわち、デブリ低減装置40を挟んで下流側は、圧力が高いにも関わらず、プラズマPが発生している上流側の空間の圧力は設定値からほとんど変化しない。つまり、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2の高い・低いにかかわらず、プラズマPが発生している第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1を一定にできていることが分かった。 As shown in the graph in Figure 13, it was found that even when the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was changed within a range of 20 Pa or less, the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 showed a value of around 2 Pa. In other words, even though the pressure was high on the downstream side across the debris reduction device 40, the pressure in the upstream space where the plasma P was generated hardly changed from the set value. In other words, it was found that the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 where the plasma P was generated could be kept constant regardless of whether the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was high or low.

 また図13に示す圧力を測定する際には、高圧力領域14に供給されるバッファガス2の流量を図12に示すシミュレーションで用いた流量と同程度に設定した。このため、高圧力領域14の圧力Phは、20Pa程度となっている。従って、デブリ低減装置40は、第2の真空チャンバの圧力P2が少なくとも高圧力領域Phの圧力以下の範囲で変化する際に、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力を実質的に変化させないと言える。これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバの圧力が変化しても、第1の真空チャンバの圧力を十分に維持することが可能となる。 When measuring the pressure shown in FIG. 13, the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 supplied to the high pressure region 14 was set to approximately the same as the flow rate used in the simulation shown in FIG. 12. As a result, the pressure Ph of the high pressure region 14 is approximately 20 Pa. Therefore, it can be said that the debris mitigation device 40 does not substantially change the pressure of the first vacuum chamber 10 when the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber changes at least within a range below the pressure of the high pressure region Ph. This makes it possible to sufficiently maintain the pressure of the first vacuum chamber, for example, even if the pressure of the second vacuum chamber changes.

 [EUV光とバッファガスによるスパッタ]
 ここまでは、主に、光源装置100における圧力の特性について説明した。以下では、光源装置100においてEUV光1とバッファガス2により生じるスパッタについて説明する。
[Sputtering by EUV light and buffer gas]
Up to this point, the description has been mainly given of the pressure characteristics in the light source device 100. In the following, sputtering caused by the EUV light 1 and the buffer gas 2 in the light source device 100 will be described.

 一般に、EUV光1を扱う光学系は、プラズマPから放散されるデブリや、炭素系の付着物(カーボンコンタミ)により汚染され、性能が低下する可能性がある。またチャンバ内を飛翔する高速のデブリが光学系に衝突することで、光学系の表面に設けられた反射膜等が削られる可能性もある。この対策として、高速のデブリについては、例えばバッファガス2と衝突させて低減する方法が知られている。また光学系に付着したデブリやカーボンコンタミは、活性ガス等のラジカルを利用して除去する方法が知られている。 In general, the optical system that handles the EUV light 1 can become contaminated by debris dispersed from the plasma P and carbon-based deposits (carbon contamination), which can degrade its performance. In addition, high-speed debris flying inside the chamber can collide with the optical system, potentially scraping off the reflective film on the surface of the optical system. As a countermeasure to this, a method is known in which high-speed debris is reduced by colliding it with buffer gas 2, for example. In addition, a method is known in which debris and carbon contamination that has adhered to the optical system can be removed by using radicals from active gases, etc.

 本発明者は、バッファガス2であるアルゴンガスの圧力分布と、デブリ低減装置40(DMT)とを利用して、デブリ低減装置40より下流の光学素子21等を保護する方法を検討した。この方法は、例えば、低速のデブリを回転式ホイルトラップ43で捕捉し、高速のデブリをバッファガス2で減速して固定式ホイルトラップ45で捕捉するものである。 The inventors have studied a method of protecting the optical elements 21 and other elements downstream of the debris mitigation device 40 (DMT) by utilizing the pressure distribution of the argon gas, which is the buffer gas 2. In this method, for example, low-speed debris is captured by a rotating foil trap 43, and high-speed debris is decelerated by the buffer gas 2 and captured by a fixed foil trap 45.

 一方で、デブリ低減装置40により捕捉されなかったデブリが、第2の真空チャンバ20に侵入することもあり得る。この場合、デブリ低減装置40の下流の光学素子21に高速のデブリが衝突して光学素子21がスパッタされるといった可能性がある。そこで、デブリによる光学素子21のスパッタが抑制されることを期待して、光学素子21の周辺のアルゴンガスの圧力(第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力)を上げたところ、逆に光学素子21に対するスパッタが促進されることが分かった。 On the other hand, debris that is not captured by the debris mitigation device 40 may enter the second vacuum chamber 20. In this case, high-speed debris may collide with the optical element 21 downstream of the debris mitigation device 40, causing the optical element 21 to be sputtered. In response, the argon gas pressure around the optical element 21 (pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20) was increased in the hope of suppressing sputtering of the optical element 21 due to debris, but it was found that this actually promoted sputtering of the optical element 21.

 このように、本発明者は、アルゴンガスを導入することでスパッタが生じる点を見出した。これは、EUV光1により電離(イオン化)したアルゴンガスが光学素子21に衝突することで、光学素子21の表面がスパッタされたものと考えられる。例えば、EUV光1が照射されることでアルゴンガスが電離してプラズマ(EUV誘起プラズマ)が形成される。EUV誘起プラズマが形成されると、アルゴンイオンが光学素子21に向かって加速され、光学素子21の表面にイオンが衝突してスパッタが発生する。イオンが加速される原因としては、EUV誘起プラズマと光学素子21との間に電位差が生じているためであると考えられる。このように、バッファガス2として、EUV光1により電離する電離ガス(ここではアルゴンガス)を用いることで、電離ガスによるスパッタを実現することができる。以下では、スパッタの実験結果について説明する。 In this way, the inventors have found that sputtering occurs by introducing argon gas. It is believed that this is because argon gas ionized by the EUV light 1 collides with the optical element 21, causing the surface of the optical element 21 to be sputtered. For example, argon gas is ionized by irradiation with the EUV light 1 to form plasma (EUV-induced plasma). When the EUV-induced plasma is formed, argon ions are accelerated toward the optical element 21, and the ions collide with the surface of the optical element 21 to cause sputtering. It is believed that the ions are accelerated because of a potential difference between the EUV-induced plasma and the optical element 21. In this way, sputtering by ionized gas can be achieved by using an ionized gas (argon gas in this case) that is ionized by the EUV light 1 as the buffer gas 2. The results of the sputtering experiment are described below.

 [スパッタの実験]
 図14は、スパッタの実験に用いたサンプルの配置例を示す模式図である。図14A及び図14Bに示すように、実験ではデブリ低減装置40の下流側に配置されるステージ26上にスパッタ用のサンプル27を配置した。ここでは、ルテニウム(Ru)の薄膜を形成したサンプル27として、サンプル27に対するスパッタレートを測定した。ルテニウムの薄膜は、例えばEUV光1を反射する反射面等に用いられる材料である。
[Sputtering experiment]
14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of samples used in a sputtering experiment. As shown in Fig. 14A and Fig. 14B, in the experiment, a sample 27 for sputtering was arranged on a stage 26 arranged downstream of a debris mitigation device 40. Here, the sample 27 was a sample on which a thin film of ruthenium (Ru) was formed, and the sputtering rate for the sample 27 was measured. The thin film of ruthenium is a material used for a reflective surface that reflects, for example, EUV light 1.

 図14Aでは、EUV光1の中心経路Oに対してステージ26の傾斜角度を約20°に設定した。またEUV光1を放射するプラズマPが発生する第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1(デブリ低減装置40の図中左側のエリアの圧力)は、約2Paとした。またサンプル27が配置される第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2(デブリ低減装置40の図中左側のエリアの圧力)は、約0.5Paから約11Paの範囲で設定した。 In FIG. 14A, the tilt angle of the stage 26 with respect to the central path O of the EUV light 1 is set to approximately 20°. The pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 (pressure in the area on the left side of the debris mitigation device 40 in the figure) where the plasma P that radiates the EUV light 1 is generated is set to approximately 2 Pa. The pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 (pressure in the area on the left side of the debris mitigation device 40 in the figure) where the sample 27 is placed is set in the range of approximately 0.5 Pa to approximately 11 Pa.

 また図14Aに示すように、ステージ26には、EUV光1が照射されるように5つのサンプル27を配置した。以下では、これらのサンプル27をプラズマPに近い側から順番に、Sample1、Sample2、Sample3、Sample4、Sample5と記載する。プラズマPとSample1のプラズマP側の端部との距離は、約35cmとした。またSample1~Sample5の間隔は約5cmとした。 As shown in FIG. 14A, five samples 27 were placed on the stage 26 so that they would be irradiated with the EUV light 1. Below, these samples 27 will be referred to as Sample 1, Sample 2, Sample 3, Sample 4, and Sample 5, in order from the side closest to the plasma P. The distance between the plasma P and the end of Sample 1 on the plasma P side was approximately 35 cm. The intervals between Samples 1 to 5 were approximately 5 cm.

 図14Bでは、EUV光1の中心経路Oに対してステージ26の傾斜角度を約25°から約45°の間で設定した。また第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1は、図14Aと同様に約2Paとした。また第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2は、約13Paから約19Paの範囲で設定した。ステージ26には、EUV光1が照射されるように1つのサンプル27(Sample6と記載する)を配置した。プラズマPとSample6のプラズマP側の端部との距離は、図14AのSample1の場合と同様に、約35cmとした。 In FIG. 14B, the tilt angle of the stage 26 with respect to the central path O of the EUV light 1 was set between about 25° and about 45°. The pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 was set to about 2 Pa, as in FIG. 14A. The pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 was set in the range of about 13 Pa to about 19 Pa. One sample 27 (referred to as Sample 6) was placed on the stage 26 so that it was irradiated with the EUV light 1. The distance between the plasma P and the end of Sample 6 on the plasma P side was set to about 35 cm, as in the case of Sample 1 in FIG. 14A.

 図15は、スパッタレートと圧力との関係を示すグラフである。グラフの横軸は、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2[Pa]である。また、グラフの縦軸は、スパッタレートである。なおスパッタレートの単位には、nm/Gpulseを用いている。これはプラズマPの発光回数(電力パルスの回数)が1×109回である場合にスパッタされる膜厚(nm)を表している。 15 is a graph showing the relationship between the sputtering rate and pressure. The horizontal axis of the graph is the pressure P2 [Pa] of the second vacuum chamber 20. The vertical axis of the graph is the sputtering rate. The unit of the sputtering rate is nm/Gpulse. This represents the film thickness (nm) sputtered when the number of times the plasma P emits light (the number of power pulses) is 1×10 9 times.

 図15に示す各ポイントのうち、右端のポイント以外は、図14Aに示すSample1について、スパッタレートを評価したものであり、傾斜角が約20°での結果である。
また、右端のポイントは、図14Bに示すSample6について、傾斜角を約25°に設定してスパッタレートを評価した結果である。なお、いずれのポイントも、プラズマPからの距離は、約35cmとした。
Among the points shown in FIG. 15, the points other than the rightmost point are results obtained by evaluating the sputtering rate for Sample 1 shown in FIG. 14A, and are results at an inclination angle of about 20°.
14B, the sputtering rate was evaluated when the tilt angle was set to about 25°. The distance from the plasma P to each point was set to about 35 cm.

 図15に示すように、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2が、6Pa以下の場合には、ルテニウム薄膜に対するスパッタレートは、圧力を変えても大きく変化せず、およそ5nm/Gpulse以下となる。これに対し、P2が6Pa以上になると、圧力の増加に伴い、スパッタレートが上昇することが確認された。 As shown in FIG. 15, when the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is 6 Pa or less, the sputtering rate for the ruthenium thin film does not change significantly even when the pressure is changed, and is approximately 5 nm/Gpulse or less. In contrast, when P2 is 6 Pa or more, it was confirmed that the sputtering rate increases as the pressure increases.

 図16は、スパッタレートと圧力とサンプル位置との関係を示すグラフである。図16には、図14Aに示す5つのサンプル27(Sample1~Sample5)について、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を0.7Pa、2.0Pa、5.5Pa、及び11Paにした場合のスパッタレートが角柱を用いた棒グラフにより図示されている。なお、P2=11Paの条件については、Sample1、Sample3、及びSample5のデータだけを示している。 Figure 16 is a graph showing the relationship between sputter rate, pressure, and sample position. In Figure 16, the sputter rate for the five samples 27 (Sample 1 to Sample 5) shown in Figure 14A when the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to 0.7 Pa, 2.0 Pa, 5.5 Pa, and 11 Pa is shown in the form of a bar graph using rectangular columns. Note that for the condition of P2 = 11 Pa, only the data for Sample 1, Sample 3, and Sample 5 are shown.

 例えば、Sample1についてのスパッタレートは、P2が5.5Paまでの範囲ではスパッタレートが低いが、P2=11Paの場合には、それまでの値と比べスパッタレートが大幅に増大する。同様に、Sample3及びSample5についても、P2が5.5Pa以下の範囲では、スパッタレートが低いが、P2=11Paの場合には、スパッタレートの大幅な増大が見られる。ここから、図15に示すデータと同様に、一定の圧力以下では、十分なスパッタレートが得られず有意なスパッタが生じないことがわかる。 For example, the sputtering rate for Sample 1 is low when P2 is in the range up to 5.5 Pa, but when P2 = 11 Pa, the sputtering rate increases significantly compared to the previous values. Similarly, for Sample 3 and Sample 5, the sputtering rate is low when P2 is in the range below 5.5 Pa, but when P2 = 11 Pa, a significant increase in the sputtering rate is observed. From this, as with the data shown in Figure 15, it can be seen that below a certain pressure, a sufficient sputtering rate is not obtained and significant sputtering does not occur.

 また例えば、P2=0.7Paの場合、プラズマPに近いSample1でスパッタレートが最も大きく、プラズマPから離れるほどスパッタレートが低下し、例えばSample5ではスパッタレートは略0となる。すなわち、プラズマPから離れるほどスパッタレートが低下することがわかる。これは、スパッタレートが全体に低い他の圧力(P2=2.0PaやP2=5.5Pa)でも同様である。またスパッタレートが増大する圧力(P2=11Pa)でも、プラズマPから離れるほどスパッタレートが低下する。ここから、圧力P2に関係なく、プラズマPからの距離が大きいほどスパッタレートが低下することがわかる。 For example, when P2 = 0.7 Pa, the sputter rate is highest in Sample 1, which is close to the plasma P, and the sputter rate decreases the further away from the plasma P; for example, in Sample 5, the sputter rate is approximately 0. In other words, it can be seen that the sputter rate decreases the further away from the plasma P. This is also true for other pressures (P2 = 2.0 Pa and P2 = 5.5 Pa) where the sputter rate is generally low. Also, even at pressures (P2 = 11 Pa) where the sputter rate increases, the sputter rate decreases the further away from the plasma P. From this, it can be seen that, regardless of pressure P2, the sputter rate decreases the greater the distance from the plasma P.

 図17は、スパッタレートとプラズマの発光周波数との関係を示すグラフである。図17には、プラズマP(EUV光1)の発光周波数に対するスパッタレートの周波数依存性を示す。ここでは、図14Bに示すSample6について、発光周波数を3000Hz及び6000Hzにしてスパッタレートを測定した。なお、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2は約13Paとし、サンプル27の傾斜角は約25°とした。 Figure 17 is a graph showing the relationship between the sputter rate and the emission frequency of the plasma. Figure 17 shows the frequency dependency of the sputter rate on the emission frequency of the plasma P (EUV light 1). Here, for Sample 6 shown in Figure 14B, the sputter rate was measured with emission frequencies of 3000 Hz and 6000 Hz. The pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 was set to approximately 13 Pa, and the inclination angle of the sample 27 was set to approximately 25°.

 図17に示すように、発光周波数が3000Hzの場合に比べ、6000Hzの場合には、スパッタレートが上昇した。すなわち、発光周波数に応じてスパッタレートが上昇することが確認できた。一般に、発光周波数を上げると、EUV光1の平均パワー(光量)が増加し、EUV光1により電離するアルゴンの総数、すなわち、EUV光1により生成されたアルゴンイオンの総数が増加する。図17では、このような理由でスパッタレートが上昇したものと考えられる。 As shown in Figure 17, when the emission frequency was 6000 Hz, the sputtering rate increased compared to when it was 3000 Hz. In other words, it was confirmed that the sputtering rate increases according to the emission frequency. Generally, when the emission frequency is increased, the average power (amount of light) of the EUV light 1 increases, and the total number of argon atoms ionized by the EUV light 1, i.e., the total number of argon ions generated by the EUV light 1, increases. It is believed that this is the reason why the sputtering rate increased in Figure 17.

 例えば、発光周波数を低く設定している場合、P2の値を発光周波数が高い場合と同じ圧力に設定するとスパッタの速度が遅くなる。このような場合には、P2を高くして、クリーニングのスピードを確保することができる。逆に、P2の調整が難しい場合等には、発光周波数を調整して、スパッタレートを変えることもできる。 For example, when the emission frequency is set low, setting the P2 value to the same pressure as when the emission frequency is high will slow down the sputtering speed. In such a case, P2 can be increased to ensure sufficient cleaning speed. Conversely, when it is difficult to adjust P2, the sputtering rate can be changed by adjusting the emission frequency.

 [スパッタによるクリーニング運転]
 EUV光1により電離した電離ガス(バッファガス2)によるスパッタ現象は、光源装置100においては第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられた光学素子21の表面を削る効果がある。すなわち、スパッタを利用することで、光学素子21に付着したデブリやカーボンコンタミを除去し、光学素子21をスパッタクリーニングすることが可能となる。
[Spatter cleaning operation]
The sputtering phenomenon caused by the ionized gas (buffer gas 2) ionized by the EUV light 1 has the effect of scraping the surface of the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 in the light source device 100. In other words, by utilizing sputtering, debris and carbon contamination adhering to the optical element 21 can be removed, and the optical element 21 can be sputter cleaned.

 本発明者は、この点に着目し、光源装置100に対して、EUV光1を利用装置等に供給する通常運転に加え、バッファガス2である電離ガスによるクリーニング運転を行う機能を持たせた。すなわち、光源装置100は、通常運転と、クリーニング運転とが可能である。 The inventors focused on this point and equipped the light source device 100 with the function of performing a cleaning operation using an ionized gas, which is the buffer gas 2, in addition to the normal operation of supplying the EUV light 1 to the utilization device, etc. In other words, the light source device 100 is capable of both normal operation and cleaning operation.

 通常運転は、例えばプラズマP(EUV光1)を安定的に発生させて、利用装置等にEUV光1を供給する運転である。すなわち通常運転は、光源装置100の本来の目的であるEUV光1の光源としての動作を行う運転である。以下では、通常運転時の第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を通常圧力P2nと記載する場合がある。本実施形態では、通常圧力P2nは第1の圧力に相当する。 Normal operation is, for example, an operation in which plasma P (EUV light 1) is stably generated and EUV light 1 is supplied to a utilization device or the like. In other words, normal operation is an operation in which the light source device 100 operates as a light source of EUV light 1, which is its original purpose. Hereinafter, the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 during normal operation may be referred to as normal pressure P2n. In this embodiment, normal pressure P2n corresponds to the first pressure.

 通常運転時の第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1は、EUV光1が安定する圧力P0に設定される。P0は、典型的にはプラズマPが安定して生成される圧力であり、例えば2Pa程度である。なおP0の具体的な値は限定されない。例えばプラズマ原料の種類や、放電の条件等に応じて、プラズマPを安定して生成可能な圧力がP0に設定されてよい。
本実施形態では、EUV光1が安定する圧力P0は、第3の圧力に相当する。
The pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 during normal operation is set to a pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable. P0 is typically a pressure at which the plasma P is stably generated, and is, for example, about 2 Pa. Note that the specific value of P0 is not limited. For example, a pressure at which the plasma P can be stably generated may be set to P0 depending on the type of plasma raw material, discharge conditions, etc.
In this embodiment, the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable corresponds to the third pressure.

 クリーニング運転は、通常運転とは異なり、スパッタによる光学素子のクリーニングを行う運転である。光源装置100では、通常運転とクリーニング運転とが適宜切り換えて実行される。以下では、クリーニング運転時の第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2をクリーニング圧力P2cと記載する場合がある。本実施形態では、クリーニング圧力P2cは、第2の圧力に相当する。 The cleaning operation is different from the normal operation in that it cleans the optical elements by sputtering. In the light source device 100, the normal operation and the cleaning operation are switched between as appropriate. Hereinafter, the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 during the cleaning operation may be referred to as the cleaning pressure P2c. In this embodiment, the cleaning pressure P2c corresponds to the second pressure.

 上記したように光源装置100では、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1を維持したまま、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2(光学素子21の周辺の圧力)だけを変えることが可能である。この特性を利用することで、プラズマP側の圧力P1を変えずに、光学素子21に対するスパッタ量をコントロールすることが可能となる。 As described above, in the light source device 100, it is possible to change only the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 (the pressure around the optical element 21) while maintaining the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10. By utilizing this characteristic, it is possible to control the amount of sputtering on the optical element 21 without changing the pressure P1 on the plasma P side.

 例えば第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられた光学素子21が光源であるプラズマPより飛来するデブリ等で汚染された場合には、第1の真空チャンバ10において光源の点灯動作を行ったまま、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を変化させることで、光学素子21に付着したデブリ等をスパッタ現象により削り、光学素子21をクリーニングすることが可能である。このように、光源装置100では、例えばEUV光1を安定して発生させたまま、第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられた光学素子21等をクリーニングすることができる。 For example, if the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 becomes contaminated with debris flying in from the plasma P, which is the light source, it is possible to clean the optical element 21 by changing the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 while the light source is turned on in the first vacuum chamber 10, thereby scraping off the debris adhering to the optical element 21 through the sputtering phenomenon. In this way, the light source device 100 can clean the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 while stably generating, for example, EUV light 1.

 図15及び図16等を参照して説明したように、バッファガス2によるスパッタは、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2が一定の圧力よりも高い場合に発生する。従ってその圧力よりも低い圧力では、スパッタはほとんど生じない。このため、通常圧力P2nには、スパッタが生じない圧力を設定し、クリーニング圧力P2cには、P2nよりも高く、有意なスパッタが生じる圧力を設定することになる。 As explained with reference to Figures 15 and 16, sputtering due to buffer gas 2 occurs when pressure P2 in second vacuum chamber 20 is higher than a certain pressure. Therefore, at pressures lower than that pressure, sputtering hardly occurs. For this reason, normal pressure P2n is set to a pressure at which no sputtering occurs, and cleaning pressure P2c is set to a pressure higher than P2n at which significant sputtering occurs.

 すなわちクリーニング運転は、通常運転時の圧力である通常圧力P2nに維持された第2の真空チャンバ20にバッファガス2を導入し、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を通常圧力P2nよりも高いクリーニング圧力P2cまで上昇させ、クリーニング圧力P2cを維持した状態で、第2の真空チャンバ20内に配置された光学素子21に対し、EUV光1により電離したバッファガス2によるスパッタを行う運転である。 In other words, the cleaning operation involves introducing buffer gas 2 into the second vacuum chamber 20, which is maintained at normal pressure P2n, which is the pressure during normal operation, increasing the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 to a cleaning pressure P2c that is higher than the normal pressure P2n, and, while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c, sputtering the optical element 21 placed in the second vacuum chamber 20 with the buffer gas 2 ionized by the EUV light 1.

 このように、クリーニング運転では、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を通常圧力P2nからクリーニング圧力P2cに上昇させてスパッタが行われる。この方法では、例えば第2の真空チャンバ20の排気量等を調整するだけで、容易にクリーニング運転を行うことが可能である。 In this way, in the cleaning operation, sputtering is performed by increasing the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 from the normal pressure P2n to the cleaning pressure P2c. With this method, it is possible to easily perform the cleaning operation by simply adjusting, for example, the exhaust volume of the second vacuum chamber 20.

 なお、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力が変化する場合でも、デブリ低減装置40の高圧力領域14の作用により、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1はほとんど変化せず、EUV光1が安定する圧力P0に維持される。従って、クリーニング運転を開始する場合や、通常運転に戻る場合において、第1の真空チャンバ10の排気量等を調整する必要は無い。 Even if the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 changes, the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 hardly changes due to the action of the high pressure region 14 of the debris reduction device 40, and is maintained at the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable. Therefore, when starting a cleaning operation or returning to normal operation, there is no need to adjust the exhaust volume of the first vacuum chamber 10.

 本実施形態では、クリーニング圧力P2cは、6Pa以上に設定される。例えば図15を参照すると、6Pa以上であれば、スパッタレートが圧力に応じて上昇することがわかる。従って、6Pa以上の範囲でクリーニング圧力P2cを設定することで、例えば所望のスパッタレートでのスパッタを行うことが可能となる。 In this embodiment, the cleaning pressure P2c is set to 6 Pa or more. For example, referring to FIG. 15, it can be seen that at 6 Pa or more, the sputtering rate increases in accordance with the pressure. Therefore, by setting the cleaning pressure P2c in the range of 6 Pa or more, it is possible to perform sputtering at a desired sputtering rate, for example.

 またクリーニング圧力P2cは、第1の真空チャンバ10に設定されるEUV光1が安定する圧力P0の3倍以上の圧力に設定されることが好ましい。例えばP2cがP0と同程度の圧力では、十分なスパッタレートを実現することが難しいが、3倍以上の圧力とすることで比較的高いスパッタレートを実現することができる。これにより、光学素子21のクリーニング時間を短縮するといったことが可能となる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the cleaning pressure P2c is set to a pressure of at least three times the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable, which is set in the first vacuum chamber 10. For example, if P2c is at the same pressure as P0, it is difficult to achieve a sufficient sputtering rate, but by setting the pressure at least three times higher, a relatively high sputtering rate can be achieved. This makes it possible, for example, to shorten the cleaning time for the optical element 21.

 一方で、第2の真空チャンバ20の通常圧力P2nは、例えばEUV光1が安定する圧力P0と同程度の圧力に設定される。この場合、スパッタレートを十分に下げることが可能であり、通常運転時には有意なスパッタが生じないような状態を維持することができる。これにより、通常運転中に不必要に光学素子21がスパッタされるといった事態を回避することが可能となる。 On the other hand, the normal pressure P2n of the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to, for example, a pressure equivalent to the pressure P0 at which the EUV light 1 is stable. In this case, it is possible to sufficiently lower the sputtering rate, and a state in which no significant sputtering occurs during normal operation can be maintained. This makes it possible to avoid situations in which the optical element 21 is unnecessarily sputtered during normal operation.

 クリーニング運転では、第2の真空チャンバ20をクリーニング圧力P2cに維持した状態で、光学素子21がスパッタされる。例えばクリーニング圧力P2cに応じたスパッタレートと、目的とするスパッタ量とに基づいてスパッタ時間が算出される。そしてスパッタ時間だけ、クリーニング圧力P2cが維持される。あるいは、光学素子21の特性(反射光の光量等)が汚染前の状態に戻るまで、クリーニング圧力P2cを維持するといったことも可能である。 In the cleaning operation, the optical element 21 is sputtered while the second vacuum chamber 20 is maintained at the cleaning pressure P2c. For example, the sputtering time is calculated based on the sputtering rate according to the cleaning pressure P2c and the desired amount of sputtering. The cleaning pressure P2c is then maintained for the sputtering time. Alternatively, it is also possible to maintain the cleaning pressure P2c until the characteristics of the optical element 21 (such as the amount of reflected light) return to the state before contamination.

 またスパッタ工程には、クリーニング圧力P2cを維持した状態で、EUV光1の光量を通常運転時のEUV光1の光量から変化させる工程が含まれてもよい。例えば、図17を参照して説明したように、EUV光1の光量(平均パワー)を変化させた場合にもスパッタレートの調整が可能である。従って、この工程では、EUV光1の光量を変化させることが可能な任意のパラメータが調整される。 The sputtering process may also include a process of changing the amount of EUV light 1 from the amount of EUV light 1 during normal operation while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c. For example, as described with reference to FIG. 17, the sputtering rate can also be adjusted when the amount of EUV light 1 (average power) is changed. Therefore, in this process, any parameter that can change the amount of EUV light 1 is adjusted.

 例えば、図17の場合と同様に、発光周波数を調整してもよい。この場合、スパッタレートを増加させる場合には、発光周波数を増加させればよい。また、レーザビームLBの照射強度を調整してもよいし、放電電極EA及びEBに印加するパルス電力(充電エネルギー)を調整してもよい。レーザビームの照射強度やパルス電力は、その値を増加させることで、スパッタレートを増加させることが可能である。 For example, the emission frequency may be adjusted as in the case of FIG. 17. In this case, to increase the sputtering rate, the emission frequency may be increased. Also, the irradiation intensity of the laser beam LB may be adjusted, or the pulse power (charging energy) applied to the discharge electrodes EA and EB may be adjusted. By increasing the irradiation intensity or pulse power of the laser beam, it is possible to increase the sputtering rate.

 また、スパッタ工程において、スパッタレートを変化させる他の条件が適宜変更されてもよい。例えば、光学素子21の位置をプラズマに近づけることで、スパッタレートを増加させてもよい。また、図14A及び図14Bでの実験から、サンプル27の傾斜角度を変えることでスパッタレートを調整できることがわかった。すなわち、スパッタレートを調整するために、光学素子21等に対するEUV光1の照射角度を調整してもよい。この場合、照射角度を浅くすることで、スパッタレートを下げることができる。この他、スパッタ工程において調整されるパラメータの種類は限定されない。 Furthermore, in the sputtering process, other conditions that change the sputtering rate may be changed as appropriate. For example, the sputtering rate may be increased by moving the position of the optical element 21 closer to the plasma. Furthermore, from the experiments in Figures 14A and 14B, it was found that the sputtering rate can be adjusted by changing the tilt angle of the sample 27. That is, in order to adjust the sputtering rate, the irradiation angle of the EUV light 1 with respect to the optical element 21, etc. may be adjusted. In this case, the sputtering rate can be reduced by making the irradiation angle shallower. Besides this, the types of parameters that are adjusted in the sputtering process are not limited.

 [光源装置の動作]
 図18は、光源装置100の動作例を示すフローチャートである。図18に示す処理は、本実施形態に係るクリーニング方法を実行するための処理である。以下では、第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられた光学素子21をクリーニングする場合を例に挙げて説明する。
[Operation of light source device]
Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the light source device 100. The process shown in Fig. 18 is a process for executing the cleaning method according to the present embodiment. In the following, an example of cleaning the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20 will be described.

 クリーニング運転を行うかどうかの判定には、光学素子21を通過したEUV光1の光量を検出する第2の光量モニタ25b(図2参照)の検出結果が用いられる。すなわち、図18に示す処理では、通常運転及びクリーニング運転が、第2の光量モニタ25bの検出結果に基づいて切り替えて実行される。 The detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b (see FIG. 2), which detects the amount of EUV light 1 that has passed through the optical element 21, is used to determine whether or not to perform the cleaning operation. That is, in the process shown in FIG. 18, normal operation and cleaning operation are switched and performed based on the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b.

 図18に示す処理は、光源装置100のコントローラ等を用いて自動的に行われてもよい。この場合、第2の光量モニタ25bの検出結果をもとに、圧力等が自動的に制御される。また、光源装置100のユーザが第2の光量モニタ25bの検出結果を確認することで、圧力等の制御を手動で行うようにしてもよい。また第2の光量モニタ25bの検出結果を読み込んだコントローラから、ユーザに対してクリーニング運転を行うための指示を出力するようにしてもよい。 The process shown in FIG. 18 may be performed automatically using a controller of the light source device 100. In this case, the pressure and the like are automatically controlled based on the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b. The user of the light source device 100 may manually control the pressure and the like by checking the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b. The controller may also read the detection result of the second light intensity monitor 25b and output an instruction to the user to perform a cleaning operation.

 まず、通常運転が実行される(ステップ101)。通常運転では、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1は、EUV光1を安定する圧力P0に設定される。また第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2は、通常圧力P2nに設定される。これにより、安定したEUV光1を利用装置等に供給することができる。 First, normal operation is performed (step 101). In normal operation, the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10 is set to a pressure P0 that stabilizes the EUV light 1. The pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is set to a normal pressure P2n. This allows stable EUV light 1 to be supplied to a utilization device, etc.

 次に、クリーニング運転を開始するか否かが判定される(ステップ102)。具体的には、第2の光量モニタ25bが検出した光量(光学素子21を通過したEUV光1の光量)が、所定の閾値(開始判定閾値)よりも低いか否かが判定される。開始判定閾値は、例えば通常運転において利用装置等に供給されるEUV光1の光量の下限値である。この他、開始判定閾値の設定方法は限定されない。本実施形態では、開始判定閾値は、第1の閾値に相当する。 Next, it is determined whether or not to start the cleaning operation (step 102). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b (light amount of the EUV light 1 that has passed through the optical element 21) is lower than a predetermined threshold (start determination threshold). The start determination threshold is, for example, the lower limit of the light amount of the EUV light 1 supplied to the utilization device, etc. in normal operation. There are no other limitations on the method of setting the start determination threshold. In this embodiment, the start determination threshold corresponds to the first threshold.

 例えば光量が開始判定閾値以上である場合、光学素子21の汚れは許容できる範囲であるとして、クリーニング運転を開始しないと判定される(ステップ102のNo)。この場合、ステップ101に戻り通常運転が継続される。 For example, if the light amount is equal to or greater than the start determination threshold, it is determined that the dirt on the optical element 21 is within an acceptable range and that the cleaning operation should not be started (No in step 102). In this case, the process returns to step 101 and normal operation continues.

 一方、光量が開始判定閾値よりも低い場合、光学素子21の汚れは許容できないレベルに達したものとして、クリーニング運転を開始すると判定される(ステップ102のYes)。この場合、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を上昇させる圧力上昇工程が実行される(ステップ103)。 On the other hand, if the light amount is lower than the start determination threshold, it is determined that the contamination of the optical element 21 has reached an unacceptable level, and a cleaning operation is to be started (Yes in step 102). In this case, a pressure increase step is executed to increase the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 (step 103).

 圧力上昇工程は、プラズマPを発生させた状態で、通常運転時の圧力である通常圧力P2nに維持された第2の真空チャンバ20にEUV光1により電離する電離ガス(バッファガス2)を導入し、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を通常圧力P2nよりも高いクリーニング圧力P2cまで上昇させる工程である。例えば、第2の真空チャンバ20の排気量が少なくして、P2=P2cとなるように第2の真空バルブ52が調整される。また例えば、第2の真空チャンバ20に流入するバッファガス2の流量が増加するように流量調整バルブが調整されてもよい。 The pressure increase process is a process in which, while plasma P is being generated, an ionized gas (buffer gas 2) that is ionized by EUV light 1 is introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20, which is maintained at normal pressure P2n, which is the pressure during normal operation, and the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is increased to a cleaning pressure P2c that is higher than the normal pressure P2n. For example, the exhaust volume of the second vacuum chamber 20 is reduced, and the second vacuum valve 52 is adjusted so that P2 = P2c. Also, for example, the flow rate control valve may be adjusted so that the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20 is increased.

 第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力がクリーニング圧力に到達すると、光学素子21をスパッタするスパッタ工程が実行される(ステップ104)。スパッタ工程は、クリーニング圧力P2cを維持した状態で、第2の真空チャンバ20内に配置されたターゲットである光学素子21に対し、EUV光1により電離したバッファガス2によるスパッタを行う工程である。ここでは、第2の真空チャンバ20をクリーニング圧力P2cに維持することで、P2cに応じたスパッタレートで、光学素子21の表面がスパッタされ、デブリ等が除去される。 When the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 reaches the cleaning pressure, a sputtering process is performed to sputter the optical element 21 (step 104). The sputtering process is a process in which the optical element 21, which is the target placed in the second vacuum chamber 20, is sputtered with the buffer gas 2 ionized by the EUV light 1 while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c. Here, by maintaining the second vacuum chamber 20 at the cleaning pressure P2c, the surface of the optical element 21 is sputtered at a sputtering rate according to P2c, and debris and the like are removed.

 また、スパッタ工程では、クリーニング圧力P2cを維持した状態で、EUV光1の光量を通常運転時のEUV光1の光量から変化させる工程(光量調整工程)が実行されてもよい。光量調整工程は、例えば所望のスパッタレートが得られるように、EUV光1の光量を変化させることが可能なパラメータ(EUV光1の発光周波数、レーザビームLBの輝度、及びパルス電力等)を調整する工程である。 In addition, in the sputtering process, a process (light intensity adjustment process) may be performed in which the amount of EUV light 1 is changed from the amount of EUV light 1 during normal operation while maintaining the cleaning pressure P2c. The light intensity adjustment process is a process of adjusting parameters (such as the emission frequency of EUV light 1, the brightness of the laser beam LB, and the pulse power) that can change the amount of EUV light 1 so as to obtain, for example, a desired sputtering rate.

 光量調整工程を導入することで、例えばクリーニング圧力P2cだけではスパッタレートの調整が難しいような場合でも、所望のスパッタレートを実現することが可能となる。
なお、スパッタレートを調整する方法は限定されない。例えば光学素子21の位置(プラズマPからの距離)や、姿勢(EUV光1の照射角度)等が調整されてもよい。
By introducing the light amount adjustment process, it becomes possible to realize a desired sputtering rate even in cases where it is difficult to adjust the sputtering rate using only the cleaning pressure P2c.
The method for adjusting the sputtering rate is not limited to a specific one. For example, the position (distance from the plasma P) or the attitude (irradiation angle of the EUV light 1) of the optical element 21 may be adjusted.

 このように、図18に示す処理では、第2の光量モニタ25bが検出した光量が開始判定閾値よりも低くなった場合に、圧力上昇工程とスパッタ工程とが実行される。これにより、光学素子21のクリーニングが必要になったタイミングで、クリーニング運転(圧力上昇工程及びスパッタ工程)を行うことが可能となる。また不必要なクリーニング運転を回避することも可能となる。 In this way, in the process shown in FIG. 18, the pressure increase process and the sputtering process are executed when the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b becomes lower than the start determination threshold. This makes it possible to perform the cleaning operation (pressure increase process and sputtering process) at the timing when cleaning of the optical element 21 becomes necessary. It also makes it possible to avoid unnecessary cleaning operations.

 スパッタ工程が実行されると、クリーニング運転を終了するか否かが判定される(ステップ105)。具体的には、第2の光量モニタ25bが検出した光量が、所定の閾値(終了判定閾値)よりも高いか否かが判定される。終了判定閾値は、上記した開始判定閾値以上の値に設定される。本実施形態では、終了判定閾値は、第2の閾値に相当する。 When the sputtering process is performed, it is determined whether or not to end the cleaning operation (step 105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b is higher than a predetermined threshold (end determination threshold). The end determination threshold is set to a value equal to or greater than the start determination threshold described above. In this embodiment, the end determination threshold corresponds to the second threshold.

 例えば通常運転において利用装置等に供給されるEUV光1の光量の適正値が終了判定閾値に設定される。これによりEUV光1の光量を適正値に戻すことが可能となる。あるいは、EUV光1の光量の上限値が終了判定閾値に設定されてもよい。また、開始判定閾値と同じ値が終了判定閾値に設定されてもよい。この他、終了判定閾値の設定方法は限定されない。 For example, the appropriate value of the amount of EUV light 1 supplied to the utilization device during normal operation is set as the end judgment threshold. This makes it possible to return the amount of EUV light 1 to an appropriate value. Alternatively, the upper limit value of the amount of EUV light 1 may be set as the end judgment threshold. Also, the same value as the start judgment threshold may be set as the end judgment threshold. There are no other limitations on the method of setting the end judgment threshold.

 第2の光量モニタ25bが検出した光量が終了判定閾値よりも低い場合、光学素子21の汚れが残っているとして、クリーニング運転を終了しないと判定される(ステップ105のNo)。この場合、ステップ104に戻りスパッタ工程が継続される。 If the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b is lower than the end judgment threshold, it is determined that dirt remains on the optical element 21 and the cleaning operation is not to be ended (No in step 105). In this case, the process returns to step 104 and the sputtering process continues.

 一方、光量が終了判定閾値よりも高い場合、光学素子21が許容できるレベルにまでクリーニングされたものとして、クリーニング運転を終了すると判定される(ステップ105のYes)。この場合、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を下降させる圧力下降工程が実行される(ステップ106)。 On the other hand, if the light amount is higher than the end determination threshold, it is determined that the optical element 21 has been cleaned to an acceptable level, and the cleaning operation is to be ended (Yes in step 105). In this case, a pressure reduction step is executed to reduce the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20 (step 106).

 圧力下降工程は、第2の光量モニタ25bが検出した光量が終了判定閾値よりも高くなった場合に、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を通常圧力P2nになるまで下降させる工程である。例えば、第2の真空チャンバ20の排気量が多くして、P2=P2nとなるように第2の真空バルブ52が調整される。また例えば、第2の真空チャンバ20に流入するバッファガス2の流量が減少するように流量調整バルブが調整されてもよい。 The pressure reduction process is a process in which the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is reduced to the normal pressure P2n when the light amount detected by the second light amount monitor 25b becomes higher than the end determination threshold. For example, the second vacuum valve 52 is adjusted so that the exhaust volume of the second vacuum chamber 20 is increased and P2=P2n is satisfied. Also, for example, the flow control valve may be adjusted so that the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 flowing into the second vacuum chamber 20 is reduced.

 この工程は、例えば第2の真空バルブ52や流量調整バルブを通常運転時の状態に戻す工程であると言える。なお、スパッタ工程において、EUV光1の光量を変化させるパラメータや、光学素子21の位置・姿勢等を調整した場合には、通常運転時の状態に戻される。これにより、クリーニング運転を終了し、通常運転に戻ることが可能となる。 This process can be said to be a process of returning, for example, the second vacuum valve 52 and the flow rate control valve to their normal operating states. Note that if the parameters for changing the amount of EUV light 1 or the position and attitude of the optical element 21 are adjusted during the sputtering process, they are returned to their normal operating states. This makes it possible to end the cleaning operation and return to normal operation.

 第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2が通常圧力P2nに戻ると、光源装置100の運転を停止するか否かが判定される(ステップ107)。例えばメンテナンス等で運転を停止する場合(ステップ107のYes)、光源装置100が停止される。また運転を停止しない場合(ステップ107のNo)、ステップ101に戻り通常運転が再開される。 When the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 returns to the normal pressure P2n, it is determined whether or not to stop the operation of the light source device 100 (step 107). For example, if the operation is to be stopped for maintenance or the like (Yes in step 107), the light source device 100 is stopped. If the operation is not to be stopped (No in step 107), the process returns to step 101 and normal operation is resumed.

 このように、クリーニング運転では、光学素子21が置かれたデブリ低減装置40より下流の圧力(第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2)を変化させる運転である。これに対し、光源装置100は、デブリ低減装置40より下流の圧力を変えても、デブリ低減装置40より上流にあるプラズマPの発光点がある空間の圧力(第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P2)が変わらない。つまり、クリーニング運転を行う場合でも、光源側では、主要な動作条件を変える必要がない。これにより、クリーニング運転が終了した場合には、速やかに通常運転に復帰することが可能となる。 In this way, the cleaning operation is an operation that changes the pressure downstream of the debris reduction device 40 in which the optical element 21 is placed (pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20). In contrast, even if the pressure downstream of the debris reduction device 40 is changed in the light source device 100, the pressure in the space where the emission point of the plasma P is located upstream of the debris reduction device 40 (pressure P2 in the first vacuum chamber 10) does not change. In other words, even when a cleaning operation is performed, there is no need to change the main operating conditions on the light source side. This makes it possible to quickly return to normal operation when the cleaning operation is completed.

 [スパッタ領域とマスクの利用]
 図19は、スパッタが生じるスパッタ領域について説明する模式図である。ここでは、EUV光1が照射されたバッファガス2によるスパッタが生じる領域(スパッタ領域70)を確認するために行った実験について模式図を用いて説明する。なおスパッタ領域70とは、スパッタ現象により実際にサンプル27の表面がエッチングされる領域のことである。
[Sputter area and mask usage]
19 is a schematic diagram for explaining a sputtering region where sputtering occurs. Here, an experiment conducted to confirm a region (sputtering region 70) where sputtering occurs due to a buffer gas 2 irradiated with EUV light 1 will be explained using the schematic diagram. The sputtering region 70 refers to a region where the surface of a sample 27 is actually etched by the sputtering phenomenon.

 図19の左側の図は、スパッタされる前のサンプル27の状態を示す模式図である。実験では、第2の真空チャンバ20に導入されるステージ26に板状のサンプル27をボルトで固定した。サンプル27としては、表面が酸化さているタングステン(W)の薄膜を使用した。サンプル27の表面に形成された酸化タングステンは、金属光沢がなく黒色であった。ここでは、酸化タングステンの色を暗いグレーで模式的に図示している。 The diagram on the left side of Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing the state of sample 27 before it is sputtered. In the experiment, plate-shaped sample 27 was fixed with bolts to stage 26 which was introduced into second vacuum chamber 20. A thin film of tungsten (W) with an oxidized surface was used as sample 27. The tungsten oxide formed on the surface of sample 27 was black with no metallic luster. Here, the color of tungsten oxide is diagrammatically shown as dark gray.

 次に、図19の中央の図に示すように、サンプル27の一部がEUV光1の光路と重なるように第2の真空チャンバ20に導入し、P2=13Paとしてスパッタを行った。図中の点線の範囲は、EUV光1の光路を表している。実験では、サンプル27の設置場所をEUV光1の光路(EUV光1の照射範囲)の端に設定し、不純物を発生するような遮光部材を使わずに、サンプル27の左半分にだけEUV光1が照射されるようにした。 Next, as shown in the center diagram of Figure 19, the sample 27 was introduced into the second vacuum chamber 20 so that part of it overlapped with the optical path of the EUV light 1, and sputtering was performed with P2 = 13 Pa. The dotted area in the diagram represents the optical path of the EUV light 1. In the experiment, the sample 27 was placed at the end of the optical path of the EUV light 1 (irradiation range of the EUV light 1), and the EUV light 1 was irradiated only to the left half of the sample 27, without using a light-shielding member that would generate impurities.

 図19の右側の図は、スパッタされた後のサンプル27の状態を示す模式図である。EUV光1が照射されていないサンプル27の右半分では、酸化タングステンの黒色が残った。一方で、EUV光1が照射されたサンプル27の左半分では、金属光沢が確認された。つまり、EUV光1が照射された部位では、酸化タングステンがエッチングされたことになる。ここでは、酸化タングステンが除去されて露出したタングステンの色を明るいグレーで模式的に図示している。また、サンプル27において明るいグレーの領域が、スパッタ領域70となる。 The diagram on the right side of Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing the state of sample 27 after sputtering. In the right half of sample 27, which was not irradiated with EUV light 1, the black color of tungsten oxide remained. Meanwhile, a metallic luster was confirmed in the left half of sample 27, which was irradiated with EUV light 1. In other words, tungsten oxide was etched in the area irradiated with EUV light 1. Here, the color of the tungsten exposed after the tungsten oxide was removed is shown as light gray. The light gray area of sample 27 becomes the sputtered area 70.

 このように、EUV光1が照射される領域が、スパッタによるエッチングが生じるスパッタ領域70となることが分かった。また、第2の真空チャンバ20の内部であっても、EUV光1が照射されない領域では、スパッタによるエッチングがほとんど発生しないことが分かった。つまり、EUV光1の照射を制限することで、スパッタ領域70を制限することが可能となる。以下では、遮光板を利用してEUV光1の照射を制限する構成について説明する。 In this way, it was found that the area irradiated with the EUV light 1 becomes the sputtering area 70 where etching by sputtering occurs. It was also found that even inside the second vacuum chamber 20, in areas not irradiated with the EUV light 1, etching by sputtering hardly occurs at all. In other words, it is possible to limit the sputtering area 70 by limiting the irradiation of the EUV light 1. Below, a configuration for limiting the irradiation of the EUV light 1 by using a light shielding plate will be described.

 図20は、遮光板を利用した光学系の構成例を示す模式図である。図20に示す光学系24aは、プラズマPから放射されデブリ低減装置40を通過したEUV光1を集光する光学系である。デブリ低減装置40の左側は、プラズマPが発生する第1の真空チャンバ10内の空間であり、デブリ低減装置40の右側は、光学系24aが配置される第2の真空チャンバ20内の空間である。 Figure 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of an optical system that uses a light shielding plate. The optical system 24a shown in Figure 20 is an optical system that collects the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P and passed through the debris reduction device 40. The left side of the debris reduction device 40 is the space in the first vacuum chamber 10 where the plasma P is generated, and the right side of the debris reduction device 40 is the space in the second vacuum chamber 20 where the optical system 24a is located.

 光学系24aは、筒形の集光ミラー71aと、遮光板72aとを有する。集光ミラー71aは、第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられる光学素子21の一例である。また光学系24aは、例えば図2を参照して説明した光源装置100に、遮光板72aを追加した構成となっている。 The optical system 24a has a cylindrical collecting mirror 71a and a light shielding plate 72a. The collecting mirror 71a is an example of an optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20. The optical system 24a is configured by adding a light shielding plate 72a to the light source device 100 described with reference to FIG. 2, for example.

 集光ミラー71aは、内側に回転対称な筒状の反射面を有し、反射面の中心軸がEUV光1の中心経路Oと一致するように配置される。また集光ミラー71aは、中心経路Oを軸として回転可能に支持される。遮光板72aは、板状の部材であり、デブリ低減装置40を通過して集光ミラー71aに向かうEUV光の一部を遮光する。ここでは、集光ミラー71aにおいてEUV光1が入射する領域の上半分を覆うように遮光板72aが配置される。なお、EUV光1が入射する領域の2/3の領域を覆うような遮光板72aや、3/4の領域を覆うような遮光板72aが用いられてもよい。 The collector mirror 71a has a rotationally symmetric cylindrical reflective surface on the inside, and is positioned so that the central axis of the reflective surface coincides with the central path O of the EUV light 1. The collector mirror 71a is supported so that it can rotate around the central path O. The light shielding plate 72a is a plate-shaped member that shields a portion of the EUV light that passes through the debris mitigation device 40 and heads toward the collector mirror 71a. Here, the light shielding plate 72a is positioned so as to cover the upper half of the area on the collector mirror 71a where the EUV light 1 is incident. Note that a light shielding plate 72a that covers 2/3 of the area on which the EUV light 1 is incident, or a light shielding plate 72a that covers 3/4 of the area may also be used.

 光学系24aでは、デブリ低減装置40を通過したEUV光1のうち、遮光板72aにより遮光されずに集光ミラー71aに入射したEUV光1が集光される。この場合、集光ミラー71aにおいてEUV光1が照射される反射面では、バッファガス2によるエッチングが生じる。このため、時間の経過とともに反射面の劣化が生じる可能性がある。一方で、遮光板72aにより遮光された反射面では、バッファガス2によるエッチングが生じないため、劣化の無い反射面を維持することができる。 In the optical system 24a, the EUV light 1 that has passed through the debris mitigation device 40 and is not blocked by the light shielding plate 72a and is incident on the collector mirror 71a is collected. In this case, the reflective surface of the collector mirror 71a that is irradiated with the EUV light 1 is etched by the buffer gas 2. This may cause deterioration of the reflective surface over time. On the other hand, the reflective surface that is shielded by the light shielding plate 72a is not etched by the buffer gas 2, so the reflective surface can be maintained without deterioration.

 例えば、それまでEUV光1を反射していた反射面の特性が悪化した場合には、集光ミラー71aを回転させて劣化の無い反射面を使用することができる。また集光ミラー71aは、中心経路Oを軸に回転されるため、集光ミラー71aの回転によりEUV光1の光路は変更されない。これにより、集光ミラー71aの交換等を行わなくても、集光性能を維持することが可能となり、例えばメンテナンス期間を延長するといったことが可能となる。 For example, if the characteristics of the reflective surface that has been reflecting the EUV light 1 deteriorate, the collector mirror 71a can be rotated to use an undegraded reflective surface. Furthermore, since the collector mirror 71a rotates around the central path O as an axis, the optical path of the EUV light 1 is not changed by the rotation of the collector mirror 71a. This makes it possible to maintain the collection performance without replacing the collector mirror 71a, making it possible, for example, to extend the maintenance period.

 図21は、遮光板を利用した光学系の他の構成例を示す模式図である。図21に示す光学系24bは、例えば第1の真空チャンバ10に設けられ、プラズマPから放射されたEUV光1を集光する光学系である。光学系24bは、凹型の集光ミラー71bと、遮光板72bとを有する。 FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of an optical system using a light shielding plate. The optical system 24b shown in FIG. 21 is an optical system that is provided, for example, in the first vacuum chamber 10, and collects the EUV light 1 emitted from the plasma P. The optical system 24b has a concave collector mirror 71b and a light shielding plate 72b.

 集光ミラー71bは、例えば回転曲面により構成される凹状の反射面を有し、反射面をプラズマPに向けて配置される。また集光ミラー71bは、反射面の中心軸Cの周りに回転可能に支持される。なお、集光ミラー71bは、中心軸Cの周りに回転した場合にEUV光1の集光位置が変化しないような構成であれば、複数のミラーで構成されてもよい。
遮光板72bは、プラズマPから集光ミラー71bに向かうEUV光の一部を遮光する。
ここでは、集光ミラー71bの下半分の反射面を覆うように遮光板72bが配置されるが、遮光板72bが覆う反射面の範囲は限定されない。
The collector mirror 71b has a concave reflective surface formed, for example, by a curved surface of revolution, and is disposed with the reflective surface facing the plasma P. The collector mirror 71b is supported so as to be rotatable about a central axis C of the reflective surface. Note that the collector mirror 71b may be composed of multiple mirrors as long as the focusing position of the EUV light 1 does not change when the collector mirror 71b rotates about the central axis C.
The light shielding plate 72b blocks a portion of the EUV light traveling from the plasma P toward the collector mirror 71b.
Here, the light shielding plate 72b is disposed so as to cover the lower half of the reflecting surface of the collecting mirror 71b, but the range of the reflecting surface covered by the light shielding plate 72b is not limited.

 例えばプラズマPが発生する第1の真空チャンバ10においても、プラズマPの発光条件等によっては、集光ミラー71bのような光学素子を劣化させるようなスパッタが発生することが考えられる。光学系24bでは、例えば集光ミラー71bの反射面の特性が悪化した場合、図20の場合と同様に、集光ミラー71bを回転させて劣化の無い反射面を使用することができる。これにより、集光ミラー71bの交換等を行わなくても、集光性能を維持することが可能となる。 For example, even in the first vacuum chamber 10 where the plasma P is generated, depending on the light emission conditions of the plasma P, sputtering that deteriorates optical elements such as the collecting mirror 71b may occur. In the optical system 24b, for example, if the characteristics of the reflecting surface of the collecting mirror 71b deteriorate, the collecting mirror 71b can be rotated to use an undegraded reflecting surface, as in the case of FIG. 20. This makes it possible to maintain the collecting performance without replacing the collecting mirror 71b.

 以上、本実施形態に係る光源装置100では、デブリ低減装置40により、プラズマPを発生させる第1の真空チャンバ10と、プラズマPからのEUV光1が導入される第2の真空チャンバ20とをつなぐ真空路13が形成される。さらに真空路13を遮るように、第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1及び第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2よりも圧力が高い高圧力領域14が形成される。これにより、例えば第2の真空チャンバ20での圧力の変化が高圧力領域14により吸収される。このため、EUV光1の導入側の圧力P2の変化による光源側の圧力P1の変化を抑制することが可能となる。 As described above, in the light source device 100 according to this embodiment, the debris reduction device 40 forms a vacuum path 13 connecting the first vacuum chamber 10, which generates the plasma P, and the second vacuum chamber 20, into which the EUV light 1 from the plasma P is introduced. Furthermore, a high-pressure region 14, whose pressure is higher than the pressure P1 of the first vacuum chamber 10 and the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20, is formed so as to block the vacuum path 13. This allows, for example, pressure changes in the second vacuum chamber 20 to be absorbed by the high-pressure region 14. This makes it possible to suppress changes in pressure P1 on the light source side due to changes in pressure P2 on the introduction side of the EUV light 1.

 一般に、プラズマPから放射されるEUV光1等の放射光は、真空状態に維持された通路を通して利用装置に導入される。このため通路の途中に設けられた光学系のメンテナンスや利用装置側の条件変更等により、導入側の圧力を変化させると、それがプラズマP周辺の圧力の変化につながることが考えられる。この場合、プラズマPの発光条件が変化し、EUV光1等の放射光が不安定になる可能性がある。 Generally, radiation such as EUV light 1 emitted from plasma P is introduced into the utilization device through a passage maintained in a vacuum state. For this reason, if the pressure on the introduction side is changed due to maintenance of the optical system installed in the middle of the passage or a change in the conditions on the utilization device side, it is thought that this will lead to a change in the pressure around plasma P. In this case, the light emission conditions of plasma P will change, and radiation such as EUV light 1 may become unstable.

 本実施形態に係る光源装置100では、デブリ低減装置40の内部に、差動排気を可能にする高圧力領域14が形成される。これにより、EUV光1の導入側となる第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2の変化が、高圧力領域14のバッファガス2の流量により吸収され、プラズマPが発生する光源エリアとなる第1の真空チャンバ10の圧力P1に影響を与えない。もちろん、高圧力領域14を発生させるデブリ低減装置40では、プラズマPからのデブリを低減する機能も維持される。 In the light source device 100 according to this embodiment, a high-pressure region 14 that enables differential pumping is formed inside the debris mitigation device 40. As a result, changes in pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20, which is the introduction side of the EUV light 1, are absorbed by the flow rate of the buffer gas 2 in the high-pressure region 14, and do not affect the pressure P1 in the first vacuum chamber 10, which is the light source area where the plasma P is generated. Of course, the debris mitigation device 40 that generates the high-pressure region 14 also maintains the function of reducing debris from the plasma P.

 これにより、第2の真空チャンバ20へのデブリの侵入を抑制するとともに、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2の変化によりEUV光1が不安定になるといった事態を十分に回避することが可能となる。このため、例えば光学系のメンテナンスや利用装置側の条件変更等を行うために、第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を変化させるような場合でも、EUV光1の発光動作を安定して行うことが可能となる。これにより、光源装置100やそれを利用する利用装置の操作性やメンテナンス性を向上することが可能となる。 This makes it possible to suppress the intrusion of debris into the second vacuum chamber 20, and to fully prevent the EUV light 1 from becoming unstable due to changes in the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20. Therefore, even when the pressure P2 in the second vacuum chamber 20 is changed, for example to perform maintenance on the optical system or to change the conditions on the utilization device side, it is possible to stably emit the EUV light 1. This makes it possible to improve the operability and maintainability of the light source device 100 and the utilization device that uses it.

 さらに、本実施形態では、EUV光1を安定して供給しつつ第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力P2を変化させることができるという光源装置100の特性を利用して、第2の真空チャンバ20に設けられた光学素子21のスパッタによるクリーニングが行われる。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, the characteristic of the light source device 100 that allows the pressure P2 of the second vacuum chamber 20 to be changed while stably supplying the EUV light 1 is utilized to perform sputter cleaning of the optical element 21 provided in the second vacuum chamber 20.

 スパッタによるクリーニングでは、例えば第2の真空チャンバ20の圧力を増減させることでスパッタレートを変化させることが可能である。例えば、光学素子21等を損傷させたくない場合には、スパッタされにくい条件で装置が稼働される。また光学素子21等の汚染が許容レベルを超えた場合には、あえてスパッタを行う圧力に設定することで、汚れた表面をエッチングしてクリーニングすることが可能となる。 In cleaning by sputtering, it is possible to change the sputtering rate, for example, by increasing or decreasing the pressure in the second vacuum chamber 20. For example, if it is desired to avoid damaging the optical element 21, the device is operated under conditions that make sputtering less likely. Also, if contamination of the optical element 21, etc., exceeds an acceptable level, the pressure can be deliberately set to perform sputtering, making it possible to etch and clean the contaminated surface.

 また、第1の真空チャンバ10において発光出力(EUV光1の光量)を増減させてもスパッタレートの調整が可能である。また光学素子21の位置や姿勢を変えることで、スパッタのむら等を改善することが可能である。また光学素子21の前方に遮蔽物を置いてスパッタしたい部分を限定するといったことも可能である。 The sputtering rate can also be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the emission output (amount of EUV light 1) in the first vacuum chamber 10. Also, by changing the position and attitude of the optical element 21, it is possible to improve unevenness in sputtering. It is also possible to place a shield in front of the optical element 21 to limit the area to be sputtered.

 このようなスパッタ現象を発生させる電離ガスとしては、EUV光1に対して比較的吸収の少ない希ガス(典型的にはアルゴンガス)が用いられる。すなわち、電離ガスは、EUV光1の光量をほとんど低下させないため、バッファガス2として利用することができる。逆に言えば、バッファガス2として利用可能なガスを、そのままスパッタを発生させる電離ガスとして利用することが可能となる。これにより、光学素子等のクリーニングを行うために、専用のガスを用意するといった必要がなくなり、システムの構成をシンプルにするとともに、装置コストやランニングコストを抑えることが可能となる。 A rare gas (typically argon gas) that has relatively little absorption of the EUV light 1 is used as the ionized gas that generates this sputtering phenomenon. In other words, the ionized gas can be used as the buffer gas 2 because it hardly reduces the amount of light of the EUV light 1. Conversely, the gas that can be used as the buffer gas 2 can be used as the ionized gas that generates sputtering. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated gas for cleaning optical elements, etc., making it possible to simplify the system configuration and reduce equipment and running costs.

 例えばEUV光1の光学系をクリーニングする方法として、爆発性の高いガスや反応性が強いガスを用いた化学洗浄を行う方法がある。例えば、特許文献2では、金属の蒸気を用いた極端紫外光光源において、ホイルトラップやそれ以降の下流側に、水素ガスやハロゲンガスなどの反応ガスが供給される。そして光源から発生する真空紫外光や、専用の紫外光光源から発生する紫外光等を用いて反応性ガスを励起し、光学要素が洗浄される。 For example, one method for cleaning the optical system of the EUV light 1 is chemical cleaning using a highly explosive gas or a highly reactive gas. For example, in Patent Document 2, in an extreme ultraviolet light source using metal vapor, reactive gases such as hydrogen gas or halogen gas are supplied to the foil trap or downstream thereafter. The reactive gas is then excited using vacuum ultraviolet light generated from the light source or ultraviolet light generated from a dedicated ultraviolet light source, and the optical elements are cleaned.

 しかしながら、水素ガスは爆発性があるため使用することが危険である。また、ハロゲンガスは反応性が高く取り扱いが難しいガスである。このため、設備の安全の確保や装置容器の耐食などを確保するために、専門家による操作や設備のコストが必要となる。例えば反応性ガスを安全に、また装置に悪影響を及ぼすことなく排気するには、排気装置の前に反応性ガスを処理する装置を設ける必要がある。また光源や利用装置の内部に設けられる部材は、反応性ガスにより腐食される。このため、腐食に対する装置内部のメンテナンスや、反応性ガスに耐食性のある材料やコーティングを用いる必要がある。 However, hydrogen gas is explosive and dangerous to use. Furthermore, halogen gas is highly reactive and difficult to handle. For this reason, to ensure the safety of the equipment and the corrosion resistance of the equipment containers, operation by experts and the cost of equipment are required. For example, to exhaust reactive gases safely and without adversely affecting the equipment, a device to treat the reactive gas must be installed before the exhaust device. Furthermore, the components installed inside the light source and the equipment used will be corroded by the reactive gas. For this reason, it is necessary to maintain the inside of the equipment against corrosion and to use materials and coatings that are resistant to corrosion by reactive gases.

 また特開2007-13054号公報には、EUV光源を備える投影露光装置において、不活性ガスを利用して光学系を洗浄する方法が記載されている。この方法は、窒素ガス等の不活性ガスを冷却し、液体または固体になった不活性ガスを光学素子に噴射してその衝撃により付着した汚染物質をクリーニングする方法である。 In addition, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13054 describes a method of cleaning an optical system using an inert gas in a projection exposure apparatus equipped with an EUV light source. This method involves cooling an inert gas such as nitrogen gas, spraying the liquid or solid inert gas onto optical elements, and cleaning contaminants that have adhered to the optical elements due to the impact.

 しかしながら、窒素ガス等を液体あるいは固体にするには、少なくとも-50℃以下に冷却することが必要であり、この冷却には膨大な量の液体窒素など冷却媒体を必要する。
また、金属の蒸気を用いた極端紫外光光源等では、光源から飛来する金属が、低温になっている箇所で冷却され固化することが考えられる。このように金属が固化すると光学経路や光源内部に設置している部材にさまざまな悪影響を及ぼす。また、気化している金属が冷却されると微小な金属粒子を発生させる可能性がある。このような金属粒子が真空排気系に入ると、排気系の寿命を大きく縮める要因となり得る。
However, in order to turn nitrogen gas or the like into a liquid or solid, it is necessary to cool it to at least −50° C. or lower, and this cooling requires a huge amount of a cooling medium such as liquid nitrogen.
In addition, in extreme ultraviolet light sources that use metal vapor, it is possible that metal coming from the light source will cool and solidify at low temperature locations. If the metal solidifies in this way, it can have various adverse effects on the optical path and components installed inside the light source. In addition, when vaporized metal cools, it can generate tiny metal particles. If such metal particles enter the vacuum exhaust system, they can be a factor in significantly shortening the life of the exhaust system.

 これに対し、本発明者が見出したスパッタ現象では、希ガス等の不活性な電離ガス(バッファガス2)によるスパッタ(エッチング)が可能である。このように、不活性ガスを用いているので、安全に操作することが可能な光源装置100を実現できる。また、光源装置100では、反応性ガスを処理する機構や、反応性ガスを取り除く機構等は不要となる。このため反応性ガスを用いる装置等と比べて、装置コストを大幅に下げることが可能となる。また装置構成がシンプルになり、装置をコンパクトに構成することが可能となる。また電離ガスは活性ガスのような腐食を発生させない。このため、容器等の材質の選択幅が比較的広くなり、装置コストを抑えることが可能となる。 In contrast, the sputtering phenomenon discovered by the present inventors makes it possible to perform sputtering (etching) using an inert ionized gas (buffer gas 2) such as a rare gas. In this way, because an inert gas is used, a light source device 100 that can be operated safely can be realized. Furthermore, the light source device 100 does not require a mechanism for processing reactive gases or a mechanism for removing reactive gases. This makes it possible to significantly reduce device costs compared to devices that use reactive gases. In addition, the device configuration is simplified, making it possible to configure the device compactly. Furthermore, ionized gases do not cause corrosion like active gases. This allows a relatively wide range of materials to be selected for the container, etc., making it possible to reduce device costs.

 また冷却した不活性ガスを利用するような方法と違い、電離ガスを液体や固体に変えるための冷却設備等を設ける必要がなく、装置コストを下げることや、装置構成をシンプルにすることができる。また装置内には、極端に低温になるような箇所は存在しないため、スズ等の金属が集中的に固化するといった問題や、排気系に影響を与える金属粒子が増加するといった問題は発生しない。 Also, unlike methods that use cooled inert gas, there is no need to install cooling equipment to turn the ionized gas into a liquid or solid, which reduces equipment costs and simplifies the device configuration. Also, because there are no areas within the device that become extremely cold, there are no problems with concentrated solidification of metals such as tin, or an increase in metal particles that affect the exhaust system.

 また上記したように、電離ガスには、EUV光1に対して吸収の少ないガスを用いることができる。これにより、EUV光1を減光せずに、デブリ低減装置40の下流の部材をクリーニングすることが可能となる。この結果、例えば比較的高いスパッタレートが実現可能となり、短い時間でクリーニングを完了することが可能となる。 As described above, the ionized gas can be a gas that has low absorption of the EUV light 1. This makes it possible to clean components downstream of the debris mitigation device 40 without dimming the EUV light 1. As a result, for example, a relatively high sputtering rate can be achieved, and cleaning can be completed in a short time.

 <その他の実施形態>
 本発明は、以上説明した実施形態に限定されず、他の種々の実施形態を実現することができる。
<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various other embodiments can be realized.

 上記の実施形態では、レーザビームLB及び放電によりプラズマ原料をプラズマ化するLDP方式の光源部が用いられた。光源部の種類は限定されず、プラズマから放射光を発生させる形式であれば、任意の形式が用いられてよい。 In the above embodiment, an LDP type light source unit was used, which uses a laser beam LB and discharge to turn the plasma raw material into plasma. There are no limitations on the type of light source unit, and any type may be used as long as it generates radiant light from plasma.

 図22は、LPP方式の光源部の構成例を示す模式図である。図22には、レーザビームLBによりプラズマ原料を直接プラズマ化するLPP方式の光源部80が模式的に図示されている。光源部80は、第1の真空チャンバ10内に配置された回転体81と、回転体81にプラズマ原料Sを供給するコンテナCと、回転体81に供給されたプラズマ原料Sをプラズマ化するレーザビームLBを入射するレーザ源82とを有する。光源部80では、コンテナCは、原料供給部に相当し、レーザ源82は、エネルギービーム入射部に相当する。 FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of an LPP type light source unit. FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of an LPP type light source unit 80 that directly converts plasma raw material into plasma using a laser beam LB. The light source unit 80 has a rotor 81 arranged in the first vacuum chamber 10, a container C that supplies plasma raw material S to the rotor 81, and a laser source 82 that irradiates a laser beam LB that converts the plasma raw material S supplied to the rotor 81 into plasma. In the light source unit 80, the container C corresponds to the raw material supply unit, and the laser source 82 corresponds to the energy beam incidence unit.

 回転体81は、プラズマPが生成される領域までプラズマ原料Sを輸送する。ここでは、円盤状の回転体81の主面にレーザビームLBが照射される。この照射位置が、プラズマPが発生する位置となる。図22に示すように、回転体81は、鉛直方向に沿って回転可能に支持される。なお回転体81は、鉛直方向から傾斜した状態で配置されてもよい。
また回転体81の形状は円盤形状に限定されず、例えば多角形形状の回転体等が用いられてもよい。回転体81は、例えばタングステン(W)、モリブデン(Mo)、タンタル(Ta)等の高融点金属を用いて構成される。
The rotor 81 transports the plasma raw material S to a region where the plasma P is generated. Here, the main surface of the disk-shaped rotor 81 is irradiated with a laser beam LB. This irradiation position is the position where the plasma P is generated. As shown in Fig. 22, the rotor 81 is supported so as to be rotatable along the vertical direction. The rotor 81 may be disposed in a state inclined from the vertical direction.
Furthermore, the shape of the rotor 81 is not limited to a disk shape, and for example, a polygonal rotor may be used. The rotor 81 is made of a high melting point metal such as tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo), or tantalum (Ta).

 コンテナCは、回転体81の下部が浸漬するように設けられ、回転体81に液体状のプラズマ原料Sを供給する。例えば回転体81の表面にはコンテナCに収容されたプラズマ原料Sが付着する。この状態で回転体81が回転することにより、レーザビームLBの照射位置にプラズマ原料Sが供給される。そして照射位置にレーザビームLBが入射することで、プラズマPが生成され、EUV光等の放射光が放射される。 The container C is arranged so that the lower part of the rotor 81 is immersed therein, and supplies liquid plasma raw material S to the rotor 81. For example, the plasma raw material S contained in the container C adheres to the surface of the rotor 81. When the rotor 81 rotates in this state, the plasma raw material S is supplied to the irradiation position of the laser beam LB. When the laser beam LB is incident on the irradiation position, plasma P is generated and radiation such as EUV light is emitted.

 このように、回転体81の一部をコンテナCに浸漬させるタイプの光源部80は、例えば光源モジュールの薄型化を図ることが可能である。またLPP方式では、図1を参照して説明したLDP方式の光源部とは異なり、回転体が1つだけでよく、またパルス電力を供給するための設備も不要である。これにより、装置を小型化することや、装置コストを抑制することが可能となる。 In this way, the light source unit 80, in which part of the rotating body 81 is immersed in the container C, can, for example, make the light source module thinner. Also, unlike the light source unit of the LDP type described with reference to Figure 1, the LPP type requires only one rotating body and does not require equipment for supplying pulsed power. This makes it possible to miniaturize the device and reduce the device costs.

 図23は、LPP方式の光源部の他の構成例を示す模式図である。図23に示す光源部90には、第1の真空チャンバ10内に設けられ、液体状のプラズマ原料Sを貯留した状態で回転する回転ドラム91が設けられる。光源部90は、回転ドラム91に貯留されたプラズマ原料SをレーザビームLBによりプラズマ化するLPP方式の光源モジュールである。 FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of an LPP type light source unit. The light source unit 90 shown in FIG. 23 is provided in the first vacuum chamber 10 and includes a rotating drum 91 that rotates while storing liquid plasma raw material S. The light source unit 90 is an LPP type light source module that converts the plasma raw material S stored in the rotating drum 91 into plasma using a laser beam LB.

 回転ドラム91は、上方に開口し液体状のプラズマ原料Sを貯留する貯留部92を有する。貯留部92には、図示しない原料供給部から、液体又は固体の状態でプラズマ原料Sが供給される。また回転ドラム91には、貯留部92に供給されるプラズマ原料Sを液体状態で維持するために、図示しない加熱機構が設けられる。加熱機構としては、電熱線等を利用して回転ドラム91を直接加熱するヒータが用いられる。また、輻射等を利用して外側から回転ドラム91を加熱するヒータ等が用いられてもよい。 The rotating drum 91 has a storage section 92 that opens upward and stores liquid plasma raw material S. The plasma raw material S is supplied to the storage section 92 in liquid or solid state from a raw material supply section (not shown). The rotating drum 91 is also provided with a heating mechanism (not shown) to maintain the plasma raw material S supplied to the storage section 92 in a liquid state. The heating mechanism used is a heater that directly heats the rotating drum 91 using an electric heating wire or the like. Alternatively, a heater that heats the rotating drum 91 from the outside using radiation or the like may be used.

 回転ドラム91は、円盤状の基体93と当該基体93の一方の面に基体93の周縁に沿って形成された円環状の外壁部94とを有する。回転ドラム91では、基体93と外壁部94により囲まれた領域が液体状のプラズマ原料Sを貯留する貯留部92となる。回転ドラム91の貯留部92が形成される面とは反対側の面には、所定の回転軸を中心に回転する軸部材95が、回転ドラム91の中心軸と回転軸とが一致するように連結される。軸部材95は、図示を省略したモータにより回転駆動される。 The rotating drum 91 has a disk-shaped base 93 and an annular outer wall portion 94 formed on one side of the base 93 along the periphery of the base 93. In the rotating drum 91, the area surrounded by the base 93 and the outer wall portion 94 becomes a storage portion 92 that stores liquid plasma raw material S. A shaft member 95 that rotates around a predetermined rotation axis is connected to the side of the rotating drum 91 opposite the side on which the storage portion 92 is formed, so that the central axis of the rotating drum 91 coincides with the rotation axis. The shaft member 95 is rotated by a motor (not shown).

 回転軸を中心に回転ドラム91を連続的に回転すると、貯留部92に供給された液体状のプラズマ原料Sは、遠心力により外壁部94の内周面94a側に移動し、内周面94aに沿って分布する。また内周面94aに分布する液体状のプラズマ原料Sの膜厚は、回転体の回転速度に応じて調整される。 When the rotating drum 91 is rotated continuously around the rotation axis, the liquid plasma raw material S supplied to the storage section 92 moves toward the inner surface 94a of the outer wall section 94 due to centrifugal force and is distributed along the inner surface 94a. The film thickness of the liquid plasma raw material S distributed on the inner surface 94a is adjusted according to the rotation speed of the rotor.

 このように、回転ドラム91は、貯留部92の内周面94aに液体状のプラズマ原料Sを貯留する。また、貯留部92の内周面94aには、液体状のプラズマ原料Sをプラズマ化するレーザビームLBが照射される。これにより、レーザビームLBの照射位置にプラズマPが発生し、EUV光等の放射光が放射される。回転体として回転ドラム91を用いたタイプの光源部90では、例えば多量のプラズマ原料を貯留するコンテナ等を設ける必要がない。このため、プラズマ原料の加熱に要する電力等を抑制することができる。 In this way, the rotating drum 91 stores the liquid plasma raw material S on the inner circumferential surface 94a of the storage section 92. The inner circumferential surface 94a of the storage section 92 is irradiated with a laser beam LB that converts the liquid plasma raw material S into plasma. This generates plasma P at the irradiation position of the laser beam LB, and radiant light such as EUV light is emitted. In a light source section 90 of the type that uses a rotating drum 91 as a rotating body, there is no need to provide, for example, a container for storing a large amount of plasma raw material. This makes it possible to reduce the power required to heat the plasma raw material.

 上記の実施形態では、回転式ホイルトラップと固定式ホイルトラップとの両方を備えるデブリ低減装置について説明した。デブリ低減装置の構成は限定されず、例えば装置内に形成される真空路を遮るように高圧力領域を発生させることが可能な構成であれば、任意の構成が用いられてよい。 In the above embodiment, a debris reduction device equipped with both a rotating foil trap and a fixed foil trap has been described. The configuration of the debris reduction device is not limited, and any configuration may be used as long as it is capable of generating a high pressure region to interrupt the vacuum path formed within the device.

 例えば、デブリ低減装置の第2の真空チャンバ側に配置する部材として、固定式ホイルトラップに代えて、コンダクタンスを下げるような他の部材が用いられてもよい。例えばメッシュ構造やハニカム構造によりコンダクタンスを下げる部材等が用いられてもよい。
またEUV光のビーム径が小さい場合には、真空路を細くしてコンダクタンスを下げる部材等が用いられてもよい。
For example, instead of the fixed foil trap, other members that reduce conductance may be used as the member disposed on the second vacuum chamber side of the debris mitigation apparatus, such as a member having a mesh structure or a honeycomb structure that reduces conductance.
Furthermore, when the beam diameter of the EUV light is small, a member for narrowing the vacuum path and lowering the conductance may be used.

 また例えば、デブリ低減装置の第1の真空チャンバ側には、回転式ホイルトラップ及び回転式ホイルトラップカバーを配置しなくてもよい。この場合、回転式ホイルトラップカバーのように、経路方向に交差する断面を急激に広げる筒状部材を設けることで、高圧力領域を維持することが可能となる。 Also, for example, the rotating foil trap and rotating foil trap cover do not need to be placed on the first vacuum chamber side of the debris reduction device. In this case, it is possible to maintain a high pressure region by providing a cylindrical member that abruptly widens the cross section that intersects with the path direction, like the rotating foil trap cover.

 また上記の実施形態では、スパッタを発生させる電離ガスとして、バッファガスを利用する構成について説明した。これに限定されず、例えばバッファガスと、電離ガスとが異なる種類のガスであってもよい。 In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a buffer gas is used as the ionized gas that generates sputtering. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the buffer gas and the ionized gas may be different types of gas.

 例えば、バッファガスには窒素やヘリウム等の不活性ガスを使用し、電離ガスにはアルゴンガス等の希ガスを使用してもよい。この場合、例えば通常運転時には、バッファガス(窒素やヘリウム等)で高圧力領域等を発生させておき、クリーニング運転を行う場合にだけ、第2の真空チャンバに電離ガス(アルゴン等)を放出するようにしてもよい。このように電離ガスを必要な場合に導入する構成であっても、電離ガスによるスパッタを利用して光学素子等のクリーニングが可能である。 For example, an inert gas such as nitrogen or helium may be used as the buffer gas, and a rare gas such as argon gas may be used as the ionized gas. In this case, for example, during normal operation, a high pressure region may be generated with the buffer gas (nitrogen, helium, etc.), and an ionized gas (argon, etc.) may be released into the second vacuum chamber only when a cleaning operation is performed. Even with a configuration in which an ionized gas is introduced when necessary in this way, it is possible to clean optical elements, etc. by utilizing sputtering with the ionized gas.

 図1及び図2等を参照して説明した光源装置100では、第1の真空チャンバ10の内部にデブリ低減装置30を設けられた。デブリ低減装置を設ける部位は限定されない。例えば、第1の真空チャンバ及び第2の真空チャンバの外部にデブリ低減装置を設けてもよい。この場合、第1の真空チャンバの外壁と第2の真空チャンバの外壁とをつなぐようにデブリ低減装置が設けられる。また、第2の真空チャンバの内部にデブリ低減装置が設けられてもよい。 In the light source device 100 described with reference to Figures 1 and 2, etc., the debris reduction device 30 is provided inside the first vacuum chamber 10. The location where the debris reduction device is provided is not limited. For example, the debris reduction device may be provided outside the first vacuum chamber and the second vacuum chamber. In this case, the debris reduction device is provided so as to connect the outer wall of the first vacuum chamber and the outer wall of the second vacuum chamber. The debris reduction device may also be provided inside the second vacuum chamber.

 上記の実施形態では、真空路上に高圧力領域を発生させるデブリ低減装置を搭載した光源装置を用いて、プラズマからの放射光と電離ガスとを利用したスパッタを行う方法について説明したが、放射光と電離ガスとを利用したスパッタを行うための装置の構成は限定されない。 In the above embodiment, a method for performing sputtering using radiation from plasma and ionized gas was described using a light source device equipped with a debris reduction device that generates a high-pressure region on a vacuum path, but the configuration of the device for performing sputtering using radiation and ionized gas is not limited.

 例えば、光源装置において、デブリ低減装置は、必ずしも真空路を形成しなくてもよい。この場合、プラズマが発生する空間(第1の真空チャンバ)と放射光が導入される空間(第2の真空チャンバ)とをつなぐ真空路がデブリ低減装置とは別部材により構成される。なおデブリ低減装置は、放射光の光路上に適宜配置される。このような光源装置であっても、放射光が導入される空間に電離ガスを放出することで、放射光と電離ガスとを利用したスパッタを行うことが可能である。 For example, in a light source device, the debris reduction device does not necessarily need to form a vacuum path. In this case, the vacuum path connecting the space where plasma is generated (first vacuum chamber) and the space where the synchrotron radiation is introduced (second vacuum chamber) is composed of a separate member from the debris reduction device. The debris reduction device is appropriately positioned on the optical path of the synchrotron radiation. Even with such a light source device, it is possible to perform sputtering using synchrotron radiation and ionized gas by releasing ionized gas into the space where the synchrotron radiation is introduced.

 この他、スパッタを行うための光源装置の構成や、光源装置に搭載されるデブリ低減装置の構成は限定されず、例えば放射光が照射される領域に電離ガスを放出することが可能な任意の装置を利用して、上記したスパッタ現象を発生させることが可能である。 In addition, the configuration of the light source device for performing sputtering and the configuration of the debris reduction device mounted on the light source device are not limited, and for example, any device capable of releasing ionized gas into the area irradiated with synchrotron radiation can be used to generate the above-mentioned sputtering phenomenon.

 本開示において、「Aより大きい」「Aより小さい」といった「より」を使った表現は、Aと同等である場合を含む概念と、Aと同等である場合を含なまい概念の両方を包括的に含む表現である。例えば「Aより大きい」は、Aと同等は含まない場合に限定されず、「A以上」も含む。また「Aより小さい」は、「A未満」に限定されず、「A以下」も含む。
 本技術を実施する際には、上記で説明した効果が発揮されるように、「Aより大きい」及び「Aより小さい」に含まれる概念から、具体的な設定等を適宜採用すればよい。
In this disclosure, expressions using "more than", such as "greater than A" and "smaller than A", are expressions that comprehensively include both concepts that include equivalent to A and concepts that do not include equivalent to A. For example, "greater than A" is not limited to cases that do not include equivalent to A, but also includes "A or greater". Furthermore, "smaller than A" is not limited to "less than A" but also includes "A or less".
When implementing the present technology, specific settings and the like may be appropriately adopted from the concepts included in "greater than A" and "smaller than A" so that the effects described above can be achieved.

 以上説明した本技術に係る特徴部分のうち、少なくとも2つの特徴部分を組み合わせることも可能である。すなわち各実施形態で説明した種々の特徴部分は、各実施形態の区別なく、任意に組み合わされてもよい。また上記で記載した種々の効果は、あくまで例示であって限定されるものではなく、また他の効果が発揮されてもよい。 It is also possible to combine at least two of the characteristic features of the present technology described above. In other words, the various characteristic features described in each embodiment may be combined in any way, without distinction between the embodiments. Furthermore, the various effects described above are merely examples and are not limiting, and other effects may be achieved.

 P…プラズマ
 1…EUV光
 2…バッファガス
 10…第1の真空チャンバ
 13…真空路
 14…高圧力領域
 20…第2の真空チャンバ
 21…光学素子
 30、80、90…光源部
 40…デブリ低減装置
 41…筒状部材
 42…コンダクタンス低減部
 44…回転式ホイルトラップカバー
 45…固定式ホイルトラップ
 47…導入口
 100…光源装置
 
Reference Signs List P: plasma 1: EUV light 2: buffer gas 10: first vacuum chamber 13: vacuum path 14: high pressure region 20: second vacuum chamber 21: optical element 30, 80, 90: light source section 40: debris reduction device 41: cylindrical member 42: conductance reduction section 44: rotating foil trap cover 45: fixed foil trap 47: introduction port 100: light source device

Claims (23)

 第1の真空チャンバと、
 前記第1の真空チャンバ内で光源となるプラズマを発生させる光源部と、
 前記プラズマから放散されるデブリを低減するデブリ低減装置であって、前記第1の真空チャンバと前記プラズマから放射される放射光が導入される第2の真空チャンバとをつなぎ前記放射光を通過させる真空路を形成し、前記真空路を遮るように前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力及び前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力よりも圧力が高くなる高圧力領域を発生させるデブリ低減装置と
 を具備する光源装置。
a first vacuum chamber;
a light source unit that generates plasma serving as a light source in the first vacuum chamber;
and a debris reduction device that reduces debris dispersed from the plasma, the debris reduction device forming a vacuum path that connects the first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber into which radiation light emitted from the plasma is introduced and allows the radiation light to pass, and generating a high-pressure region whose pressure is higher than that of the first vacuum chamber and that of the second vacuum chamber so as to interrupt the vacuum path.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記高圧力領域と前記第2の真空チャンバとの間で前記真空路のコンダクタンスを下げるコンダクタンス低減部を有する
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
The debris mitigation device includes a conductance reducer that reduces the conductance of the vacuum path between the high pressure region and the second vacuum chamber.
 請求項2に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記コンダクタンス低減部は、前記真空路に配置される複数のホイルと前記複数のホイルを固定する固定部材とを有する固定式ホイルトラップである
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 2 ,
The conductance reducing portion is a fixed foil trap having a plurality of foils arranged in the vacuum path and a fixing member that fixes the plurality of foils.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記高圧力領域と前記第1の真空チャンバとの間に設けられ、前記真空路の経路方向と交差する断面が前記高圧力領域よりも大きい筒状部材を有する
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
The debris mitigation device is provided between the high pressure region and the first vacuum chamber, and has a cylindrical member whose cross section intersecting with a path direction of the vacuum path is larger than that of the high pressure region.
 請求項4に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記デブリ低減装置は、複数のホイルと、前記複数のホイルを放射状に支持する回転部材とを有する回転式ホイルトラップを有し、
 前記筒状部材は、前記回転式ホイルトラップを囲む回転式ホイルトラップカバーである 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 4,
The debris mitigation device includes a rotary foil trap having a plurality of foils and a rotating member that radially supports the plurality of foils;
The cylindrical member is a rotary foil trap cover that surrounds the rotary foil trap.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記デブリ低減装置は、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力が少なくとも前記高圧力領域の圧力以下の範囲で変化する際に、前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力を実質的に変化させない 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
The debris mitigation apparatus prevents the pressure in the first vacuum chamber from substantially changing when the pressure in the second vacuum chamber changes at least within a range equal to or less than the pressure of the high pressure region.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記高圧力領域の圧力は、前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力の6倍以上の圧力である
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
A light source device, wherein the pressure in the high pressure region is six times or more the pressure in the first vacuum chamber.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、さらに、
 前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を変化させるバッファガスを導入する導入口と、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を調整する圧力調整機構とを具備する
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 , further comprising:
a buffer gas supply port for supplying a buffer gas that changes the pressure in the second vacuum chamber; and a pressure adjustment mechanism for adjusting the pressure in the second vacuum chamber.
 請求項8に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記高圧力領域は、前記バッファガスが導入される領域であり、
 前記導入口は、前記高圧力領域につながる第1の導入口を含む
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 8,
the high pressure region is a region into which the buffer gas is introduced,
The light source device, wherein the inlet includes a first inlet communicating with the high pressure region.
 請求項8に記載の光源装置であって、さらに、
 前記第2の真空チャンバを具備し、
 前記導入口は、前記第2の真空チャンバに設けられる第2の導入口を含む
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 8, further comprising:
The second vacuum chamber includes:
the introduction port includes a second introduction port provided in the second vacuum chamber.
 請求項1から10のうちいずれか一項に記載の光源装置であって
 前記バッファガスは、前記放射光により電離する電離ガスであり、
 前記光源装置は、通常運転と、前記電離ガスによるクリーニング運転とが可能である
 光源装置。
11. The light source device according to claim 1, wherein the buffer gas is an ionized gas that is ionized by the radiation,
The light source device is capable of a normal operation and a cleaning operation using the ionized gas.
 請求項11に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記クリーニング運転は、前記通常運転時の圧力である第1の圧力に維持された第2の真空チャンバに前記電離ガスを導入し、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を前記第1の圧力よりも高い第2の圧力まで上昇させ、前記第2の圧力を維持した状態で、前記第2の真空チャンバ内に配置されたターゲットに対し、前記放射光により電離した前記電離ガスによるスパッタを行う運転である
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 11,
The cleaning operation is an operation of introducing the ionized gas into a second vacuum chamber maintained at a first pressure which is the pressure during normal operation, increasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to a second pressure higher than the first pressure, and, while maintaining the second pressure, performing sputtering on a target placed in the second vacuum chamber using the ionized gas ionized by the synchrotron radiation.
 請求項12に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記第2の圧力は、6Pa以上である
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 12,
The second pressure is 6 Pa or more.
 請求項12に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記通常運転時の前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力は、前記放射光が安定する第3の圧力に設定され、
 前記第2の圧力は、前記第3の圧力の3倍以上の圧力である
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 12,
a pressure of the first vacuum chamber during normal operation is set to a third pressure at which the radiation is stable; and
The second pressure is three times or more as high as the third pressure.
 請求項11に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記電離ガスは、希ガスである
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 11,
The ionized gas is a rare gas.
 請求項11に記載の光源装置であって、さらに、
 前記第2の真空チャンバと、前記第2の真空チャンバに設けられ前記放射光の光量を検出する光量モニタとを具備し、
 前記通常運転及び前記クリーニング運転は、前記光量モニタの検出結果に基づいて切り替えて実行される
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 11, further comprising:
the second vacuum chamber; and a light amount monitor provided in the second vacuum chamber and configured to detect an amount of the radiation light,
The normal operation and the cleaning operation are switched and executed based on a detection result of the light quantity monitor.
 請求項8に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記圧力調整機構は、前記導入口から導入される前記バッファガスの流量を調整する流量調整バルブ、又は、前記第2の真空チャンバの排気量を調整する排気量調整バルブの少なくとも一方である
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 8,
The pressure adjustment mechanism is at least one of a flow rate adjustment valve that adjusts the flow rate of the buffer gas introduced from the inlet, or an exhaust amount adjustment valve that adjusts the exhaust amount of the second vacuum chamber.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記放射光は、EUV光である
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
The light source device, wherein the synchrotron radiation is EUV light.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記光源部は、
  前記第1の真空チャンバ内に放電領域を挟んで配置された一対の回転電極と、
  前記一対の回転電極にプラズマ原料を供給する原料供給部と、
  前記一対の回転電極のうち一方の回転電極の前記放電領域に面した部位に前記プラズマ原料を気化するエネルギービームを入射するエネルギービーム入射部と、
  前記一対の回転電極に前記エネルギービームにより気化した前記プラズマ原料をプラズマ化する電圧を印加する電圧源とを有する
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
The light source unit includes:
A pair of rotating electrodes disposed in the first vacuum chamber with a discharge region therebetween;
a raw material supply unit for supplying a plasma raw material to the pair of rotating electrodes;
an energy beam injection unit that injects an energy beam that vaporizes the plasma raw material onto a portion of one of the pair of rotating electrodes that faces the discharge region;
a voltage source that applies a voltage to the pair of rotating electrodes to convert the plasma raw material vaporized by the energy beam into plasma.
 請求項1に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記光源部は、
  前記第1の真空チャンバ内に配置された回転体と、
  前記回転体にプラズマ原料を供給する原料供給部と、
  前記回転体に供給された前記プラズマ原料をプラズマ化するエネルギービームを入射するエネルギービーム入射部とを有する
 光源装置。
The light source device according to claim 1 ,
The light source unit includes:
a rotor disposed in the first vacuum chamber;
A raw material supply unit that supplies a plasma raw material to the rotor;
an energy beam incident section that incidents an energy beam onto the rotating body to convert the plasma raw material supplied to the rotating body into plasma.
 光源装置を用いて行われるクリーニング方法であって、
 前記光源装置は、
  第1の真空チャンバと、
  前記第1の真空チャンバ内で光源となるプラズマを発生させる光源部と、
  前記プラズマから放散されるデブリを低減するデブリ低減装置であって、前記第1の真空チャンバと前記プラズマから放射される放射光が導入される第2の真空チャンバとをつなぎ前記放射光を通過させる真空路を形成し、前記真空路を遮るように前記第1の真空チャンバの圧力及び前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力よりも圧力が高くなる高圧力領域を発生させるデブリ低減装置とを有し、
 前記プラズマを発生させた状態で、通常運転時の圧力である第1の圧力に維持された第2の真空チャンバに前記放射光により電離する電離ガスを導入し、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を前記第1の圧力よりも高い第2の圧力まで上昇させる圧力上昇工程と、
 前記第2の圧力を維持した状態で、前記第2の真空チャンバ内に配置されたターゲットに対し、前記放射光により電離した前記電離ガスによるスパッタを行うスパッタ工程と
 を備えるクリーニング方法。
A cleaning method performed using a light source device, comprising:
The light source device includes:
a first vacuum chamber;
a light source unit that generates plasma serving as a light source in the first vacuum chamber;
a debris mitigation apparatus for reducing debris dispersed from the plasma, the debris mitigation apparatus comprising: a first vacuum chamber and a second vacuum chamber into which radiation light emitted from the plasma is introduced, forming a vacuum path through which the radiation light passes, and generating a high-pressure region having a pressure higher than that of the first vacuum chamber and that of the second vacuum chamber so as to interrupt the vacuum path;
a pressure increasing step of introducing an ionized gas that is ionized by the radiation into a second vacuum chamber that is maintained at a first pressure that is a pressure during normal operation while the plasma is being generated, and increasing the pressure of the second vacuum chamber to a second pressure that is higher than the first pressure;
a sputtering step of performing sputtering on a target placed in the second vacuum chamber with the ionized gas ionized by the synchrotron radiation while maintaining the second pressure.
 請求項21に記載のクリーニング方法であって、
 前記光源装置は、さらに、前記第2の真空チャンバと、前記第2の真空チャンバに設けられ前記放射光の光量を検出する光量モニタとを有し、
 前記光量モニタが検出した光量が第1の閾値よりも低くなった場合に、前記圧力上昇工程と前記スパッタ工程とを実行し、
 さらに、前記光量モニタが検出した光量が前記第1の閾値以上の第2の閾値よりも高くなった場合に、前記第2の真空チャンバの圧力を前記第1の圧力になるまで下降させる圧力下降工程を備える
 クリーニング方法。
22. The cleaning method according to claim 21,
the light source device further includes the second vacuum chamber and a light amount monitor provided in the second vacuum chamber and configured to detect an amount of the emitted light,
When the amount of light detected by the light amount monitor becomes lower than a first threshold, the pressure increasing step and the sputtering step are performed;
The cleaning method further comprises a pressure reducing step of reducing the pressure in the second vacuum chamber to the first pressure when the amount of light detected by the light amount monitor becomes higher than a second threshold value that is equal to or greater than the first threshold value.
 請求項21に記載の光源装置であって、
 前記スパッタ工程は、前記第2の圧力を維持した状態で、前記放射光の光量を前記通常運転時の前記放射光の光量から変化させる工程を含む
 クリーニング方法。
 
22. The light source device according to claim 21,
The sputtering step includes a step of changing an amount of the synchrotron radiation from an amount of the synchrotron radiation during the normal operation while maintaining the second pressure.
PCT/JP2024/015966 2023-06-30 2024-04-24 Light source apparatus and cleaning method Pending WO2025004512A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023-107755 2023-06-30
JP2023107755A JP2025006770A (en) 2023-06-30 2023-06-30 Light source device and cleaning method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025004512A1 true WO2025004512A1 (en) 2025-01-02

Family

ID=93938118

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2024/015966 Pending WO2025004512A1 (en) 2023-06-30 2024-04-24 Light source apparatus and cleaning method

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2025006770A (en)
TW (1) TW202520793A (en)
WO (1) WO2025004512A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007179881A (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-07-12 Ushio Inc Extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP2009088439A (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-23 Ushio Inc Cleaning method of condensing optical means in extreme ultraviolet light source device and extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP2014216286A (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-11-17 ウシオ電機株式会社 Extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP2022138771A (en) * 2021-03-11 2022-09-26 ウシオ電機株式会社 Foil trap and light source device comprising the same

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007179881A (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-07-12 Ushio Inc Extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP2009088439A (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-23 Ushio Inc Cleaning method of condensing optical means in extreme ultraviolet light source device and extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP2014216286A (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-11-17 ウシオ電機株式会社 Extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP2022138771A (en) * 2021-03-11 2022-09-26 ウシオ電機株式会社 Foil trap and light source device comprising the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2025006770A (en) 2025-01-17
TW202520793A (en) 2025-05-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI664878B (en) Devices for plasma generation and euv light sources
US12321107B2 (en) Extreme ultraviolet light source device and protection method for receiving plate member
US8039820B2 (en) Connection device
US11822258B2 (en) Foil trap and light source apparatus including the same
WO2022102201A1 (en) Foil trap cover device and debris reduction apparatus
US12414218B2 (en) Light source apparatus
JP4973425B2 (en) Cleaning method of condensing optical means in extreme ultraviolet light source device and extreme ultraviolet light source device
JP7571687B2 (en) Storage and ejection mechanism, light source device, and storage and ejection method
WO2025004512A1 (en) Light source apparatus and cleaning method
US20230418170A1 (en) Debris mitigation device and light source apparatus including the same
WO2024084796A1 (en) Light source device and raw material supply unit
KR20230141473A (en) Light source device
JP7740093B2 (en) light source device
US11774856B2 (en) Extreme ultraviolet light source device
KR20230141433A (en) Light source device
WO2024090019A1 (en) Raw material supply device and light source device
JP6036785B2 (en) Extreme ultraviolet light source device for foil trap and mask inspection
KR102923277B1 (en) Foil trap and light source apparatus having the same
WO2024185231A1 (en) Starting material supply device, light source apparatus, and starting material supply method
JP2024123409A (en) DEBRIS TRAP UNIT AND LIGHT SOURCE APPARATUS
WO2024203834A1 (en) Light source device and light-emitting unit
TW202503420A (en) Light source device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24831387

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1